You are on page 1of 302

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

V100R001

Product Description

Issue 01

Date 2007-02-14
Part Number 31400487

Huawei Technologies Proprietary


Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service.
Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, 518129, People’s Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2007. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1


1 Network Application.................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 System Architecture ......................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Position in Networks .....................................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Networking and Applications........................................................................................................................1-5
1.3.1 Point-to-Point Network ........................................................................................................................1-5
1.3.2 Chain Network .....................................................................................................................................1-5
1.3.3 Ring Network.......................................................................................................................................1-6
1.3.4 MESH Network ...................................................................................................................................1-7

2 Product Functions ......................................................................................................................2-1


2.1 Optical Layer Technology .............................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.1 Wavelength Grooming Ability .............................................................................................................2-2
2.1.2 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.3 Transmission Capacity .........................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.4 Transmission Distance .........................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.5 Networking Capability.........................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Electrical Layer Technology..........................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.1 Cross Connection Granularity..............................................................................................................2-3
2.2.2 Cross Connection Ability .....................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.3 L2 Electrical Layer Switching Ability .................................................................................................2-3
2.3 Service Access...............................................................................................................................................2-4
2.3.1 Types of Service Access.......................................................................................................................2-4
2.3.2 Ability of Service Access .....................................................................................................................2-5
2.4 Management and Auxiliary Interfaces...........................................................................................................2-5
2.5 Guaranteed Reliability...................................................................................................................................2-6
2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection.................................................................................................................2-6
2.5.2 Network Level Protection ....................................................................................................................2-6
2.6 Performance Monitoring ...............................................................................................................................2-7
2.6.1 Performance Monitoring of Access Services .......................................................................................2-7
2.6.2 Performance Monitoring of Network...................................................................................................2-8
2.7 Network Management System ......................................................................................................................2-8

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Contents Product Description

2.7.1 T2000 ...................................................................................................................................................2-9


2.7.2 Web LCT..............................................................................................................................................2-9
2.7.3 Toolkit ..................................................................................................................................................2-9
2.7.4 Simple Network Management Protocol ...............................................................................................2-9
2.7.5 Management Capability .......................................................................................................................2-9
2.7.6 Transmission of Network Management Information ...........................................................................2-9

3 Product Features .........................................................................................................................3-1


3.1 Service Processing and Grooming ................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.1 OTN Processing ...................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.2 Optical Layer Grooming ......................................................................................................................3-3
3.1.3 Electrical Layer Grooming...................................................................................................................3-4
3.2 Features of WDM Transmission Technology ................................................................................................3-5
3.2.1 Expansion.............................................................................................................................................3-5
3.2.2 Supervisory Channel............................................................................................................................3-5
3.2.3 FEC Function .......................................................................................................................................3-5
3.2.4 Tunable Wavelengths ...........................................................................................................................3-6
3.2.5 EDFA Technology................................................................................................................................3-6
3.2.6 Raman Amplification ...........................................................................................................................3-6
3.2.7 Jitter Suppression Function..................................................................................................................3-6
3.2.8 Automatic Laser Shutdown..................................................................................................................3-6
3.2.9 Optical Power Management.................................................................................................................3-9
3.2.10 Main/Slave Subrack ...........................................................................................................................3-9
3.3 Upgrade and Maintenance...........................................................................................................................3-10
3.3.1 Software Package Loading.................................................................................................................3-10
3.3.2 Hot Patch............................................................................................................................................3-10
3.3.3 Pluggable Optical Module .................................................................................................................3-10

4 Hardware Architecture..............................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Cabinet ..........................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Structure...............................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Configuration of the Integrated Cabinet...............................................................................................4-3
4.2 Subrack..........................................................................................................................................................4-3
4.2.1 Structure...............................................................................................................................................4-3
4.2.2 Slot Distribution...................................................................................................................................4-5
4.3 Functional units.............................................................................................................................................4-5
4.3.1 Optical Transponder Unit.....................................................................................................................4-6
4.3.2 Tributary Unit.......................................................................................................................................4-8
4.3.3 Line Unit ..............................................................................................................................................4-9
4.3.4 Cross-connect Unit...............................................................................................................................4-9
4.3.5 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit .....................................................................................4-10
4.3.6 Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer Unit ...................................................................................................4-11
4.3.7 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing unit ........................................................................4-12

ii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

4.3.8 Optical Amplifier Unit .......................................................................................................................4-12


4.3.9 System Control and Communication Unit .........................................................................................4-13
4.3.10 OSC Unit..........................................................................................................................................4-14
4.3.11 Optical Protection Unit ....................................................................................................................4-14
4.3.12 Spectrum Analyzer Unit...................................................................................................................4-15
4.3.13 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit......................................................................................................4-16

5 Software Architecture................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Communication Protocols and Interfaces......................................................................................................5-3
5.3 Board Software..............................................................................................................................................5-3
5.4 NE Software ..................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.5 Network Management System ......................................................................................................................5-4

6 DWDM System Configuration................................................................................................6-1


6.1 OTM..............................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................6-2
6.1.2 Functional Units...................................................................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 Signal Flow ..........................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 FOADM ........................................................................................................................................................6-3
6.2.1 OADM Equipment with Optical Multiplexer Unit and Optical Demultiplexer Unit ...........................6-3
6.2.2 OADM Equipment with OADM Units ................................................................................................6-4
6.3 ROADM........................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.1 ROADM Equipment with WSD9 Board and WSM9 Board................................................................6-6
6.3.2 ROADM Equipment with ROAM Boards ...........................................................................................6-7
6.3.3 ROADM Equipment with WSD9 Board and RMU9 Board ................................................................6-9
6.4 OLA ............................................................................................................................................................6-11
6.4.1 Functions............................................................................................................................................6-11
6.4.2 Functional Units.................................................................................................................................6-11
6.4.3 Signal Flow ........................................................................................................................................6-11

7 CWDM System Configuration ................................................................................................7-1


7.1 OTM..............................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.2 Functional Units...................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.3 Signal Flow ..........................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2 FOADM ........................................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 Functional Units...................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.3 Signal Flow ..........................................................................................................................................7-3

8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services ...............................................................................8-1


8.1 Dynamic Optical Layer Grooming................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.1 Intra-Ring Wavelength Grooming by ROAM Boards..........................................................................8-2

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 6800
Contents Product Description

8.1.2 Intra-Ring Wavelength Grooming by WSD9 Boards and RMU9 Boards............................................8-6


8.1.3 Intra-Ring Wavelength Grooming by WSD9 Boards and WSM9 Boards .........................................8-10
8.1.4 Inter-Ring Wavelength Grooming by WSD9 Boards and RMU9 Boards..........................................8-14
8.2 Electrical Layer Grooming..........................................................................................................................8-20
8.2.1 Integrated Grooming ..........................................................................................................................8-21
8.2.2 Distributed Grooming ........................................................................................................................8-21
8.2.3 Application of Electrical Layer Grooming.........................................................................................8-22

9 Protection .....................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Equipment Level Protection..........................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.1 DC Input Protection .............................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.2 Centralized Power Protection...............................................................................................................9-2
9.1.3 SCC Board 1+1 Protection...................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.4 Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection...................................................................................................9-2
9.2 Network Level Protection .............................................................................................................................9-3
9.2.1 Optical Line Protection ........................................................................................................................9-4
9.2.2 Intra-Board 1+1 Protection ..................................................................................................................9-7
9.2.3 Client-Side 1+1 Protection.................................................................................................................9-11
9.2.4 Subnetwork Connect Protection.........................................................................................................9-14
9.3 Network Management Channel...................................................................................................................9-18
9.3.1 Protection of Network Management Information Channel ................................................................9-18
9.3.2 Interconnection of Network Management Channel ...........................................................................9-20

10 Management of Optical Power............................................................................................10-1


10.1 Automatic Power Equilibrium...................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.1 Function Description........................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2 Function Implementation .................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.3 Networking of Application...............................................................................................................10-3
10.1.4 Configuration Principle....................................................................................................................10-4
10.2 Automatic Level Control...........................................................................................................................10-4
10.2.1 Function Description........................................................................................................................10-4
10.2.2 Function Implementation .................................................................................................................10-5
10.2.3 Networking of Application.............................................................................................................10-10
10.2.4 Configuration Principle..................................................................................................................10-11
10.3 Intelligent Power Adjustment..................................................................................................................10-11
10.3.1 Function Description......................................................................................................................10-11
10.3.2 Function Implementation ...............................................................................................................10-12
10.3.3 Configuration Principle..................................................................................................................10-13

11 Operation, Administration and Maintenance ..................................................................11-1


11.1 System Operation ...................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2 Administration and Maintenance............................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.1 Supervisory Board............................................................................................................................ 11-2
11.2.2 Alarm and Communication Unit ...................................................................................................... 11-3

iv Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

11.2.3 Management of the OSC.................................................................................................................. 11-5


11.2.4 Network Management...................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.2.5 System Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 11-7
11.2.6 NE User Management .................................................................................................................... 11-10

12 Technical Specifications .......................................................................................................12-1


12.1 General Specifications...............................................................................................................................12-3
12.1.1 Cabinet Specifications......................................................................................................................12-3
12.1.2 Subrack Specifications.....................................................................................................................12-3
12.1.3 DCM Frame Specifications..............................................................................................................12-4
12.1.4 Fiber-spooling Frame Specifications ...............................................................................................12-4
12.2 Wavelength and Frequency of Optical Channels.......................................................................................12-4
12.2.1 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of DWDM System....................................................12-4
12.2.2 Nominal Central Wavelengths of CWDM System...........................................................................12-6
12.3 Optical Transponder Unit Specifications...................................................................................................12-6
12.3.1 LSX Board Specifications................................................................................................................12-6
12.3.2 LSXR Board Specifications .............................................................................................................12-9
12.3.3 L4G Board Specifications..............................................................................................................12-10
12.3.4 LDGD Board Specifications ..........................................................................................................12-12
12.3.5 LDGS Board Specifications...........................................................................................................12-15
12.3.6 LQMD Board Specifications .........................................................................................................12-17
12.3.7 LQMS Board Specifications ..........................................................................................................12-21
12.3.8 LWXD Board Specifications..........................................................................................................12-25
12.3.9 LWXS Board Specifications ..........................................................................................................12-29
12.3.10 LWX2 Board Specifications ........................................................................................................12-33
12.4 Tributary Unit Specifications ..................................................................................................................12-37
12.4.1 TQM Board Specifications ............................................................................................................12-37
12.4.2 TDG Board Specifications .............................................................................................................12-40
12.4.3 TQS Board Specifications..............................................................................................................12-40
12.5 Line Unit Specifications..........................................................................................................................12-42
12.5.1 NS2 Board Specifications ..............................................................................................................12-42
12.6 Optical Multiplexer Unit and Demultiplexer Unit Specifications ...........................................................12-43
12.6.1 M40 Board Specifications..............................................................................................................12-43
12.6.2 MV40 Board Specifications...........................................................................................................12-43
12.6.3 D40 Board Specifications ..............................................................................................................12-44
12.6.4 D40V Board Specifications............................................................................................................12-44
12.6.5 FIU Board Specifications...............................................................................................................12-45
12.7 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer Unit Specifications ..........................................................................12-45
12.7.1 MR2 Board Specifications .............................................................................................................12-45
12.7.2 MR4 Board Specifications .............................................................................................................12-46
12.7.3 MR8 Board Specifications .............................................................................................................12-46
12.7.4 CMR2 Board Specifications ..........................................................................................................12-47

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary v


OptiX OSN 6800
Contents Product Description

12.7.5 CMR4 Board Specifications ..........................................................................................................12-48


12.8 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit Specifications...............................................12-48
12.8.1 ROAM Board Specifications .........................................................................................................12-48
12.8.2 WSM9 Board Specifications..........................................................................................................12-49
12.8.3 WSD9 Board Specifications ..........................................................................................................12-49
12.8.4 RMU9 Board Specifications ..........................................................................................................12-50
12.9 Optical Amplifier Unit Specifications .....................................................................................................12-50
12.9.1 OAU1 Board Specifications...........................................................................................................12-50
12.9.2 OBU1 Board Specifications...........................................................................................................12-51
12.9.3 CRPC Board Specifications ...........................................................................................................12-52
12.10 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit Specifications .................................................................................12-52
12.10.1 SC1 Board Specifications ............................................................................................................12-52
12.10.2 SC2 Board Specifications ............................................................................................................12-53
12.11 Optical Protection Unit Specifications ..................................................................................................12-53
12.11.1 OLP Board Specifications ............................................................................................................12-53
12.11.2 SCS Board Specifications ............................................................................................................12-53
12.11.3 DCP Board Specifications............................................................................................................12-54
12.12 Spectrum Analyzer Unit Specifications.................................................................................................12-54
12.12.1 MCA4 Board Specifications ........................................................................................................12-54
12.12.2 MCA8 Board Specifications ........................................................................................................12-55
12.13 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit Specifications ...................................................................................12-55
12.13.1 VA1 Board Specifications ............................................................................................................12-55
12.13.2 VA4 Board Specifications ............................................................................................................12-55
12.14 DCM Specifications ..............................................................................................................................12-56

A Environment Requirements.................................................................................................. A-1


A.1 Performance Specifications for Optical Interfaces ......................................................................................A-2
A.2 Power Source Requirements........................................................................................................................A-2
A.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility....................................................................................................................A-2
A.4 Environment Requirement ..........................................................................................................................A-2
A.4.1 Storage Environment..........................................................................................................................A-3
A.4.2 Transport Environment.......................................................................................................................A-5
A.4.3 Operation Environment......................................................................................................................A-7

B Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards ............................................................B-1


C Technology Introduction ........................................................................................................C-1
C.1 OTN Technology ......................................................................................................................................... C-2
C.1.1 Technical Background ........................................................................................................................ C-2
C.1.2 OTN Standard System........................................................................................................................ C-2
C.1.3 Features of OTN Technology ............................................................................................................. C-3
C.1.4 OTN Technology Realization Scheme ............................................................................................... C-3
C.2 FEC and AFEC ............................................................................................................................................ C-4
C.3 Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier ................................................................................................................... C-5

vi Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

C.4 Raman Amplification................................................................................................................................... C-5


C.5 CWDM Technology..................................................................................................................................... C-6

D Compliant Standards ............................................................................................................. D-1


D.1 ITU-T Recommendations............................................................................................................................D-1
D.2 IEEE Standards............................................................................................................................................D-3
D.3 Laser Security Standards .............................................................................................................................D-3
D.4 Security Standards.......................................................................................................................................D-4
D.5 Environment Related Standards ..................................................................................................................D-4
D.6 International Standards................................................................................................................................D-4

E Glossary ...................................................................................................................................... E-1


F Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................. F-1

Index ................................................................................................................................................ i-1

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary vii


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Figures

Figure 1-1 OptiX OSN 6800 system architecture...............................................................................................1-2


Figure 1-2 Position of the OptiX OSN 6800 in the network hierarchy ..............................................................1-4
Figure 1-3 Point-to-point network......................................................................................................................1-5

Figure 1-4 Chain network...................................................................................................................................1-5


Figure 1-5 Ring network ....................................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 1-6 Ring with chain.................................................................................................................................1-6

Figure 1-7 Tangent rings ....................................................................................................................................1-7


Figure 1-8 Intersecting rings ..............................................................................................................................1-7
Figure 1-9 MESH network .................................................................................................................................1-8

Figure 3-1 ALS function diagram (the OTU board without service convergence function) ..............................3-7
Figure 3-2 ALS function diagram (the OTU board with service convergence function) ...................................3-8
Figure 4-1 Appearance of an ETSI 300 mm middle-column cabinet .................................................................4-2

Figure 4-2 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram ....................................................................................4-4


Figure 4-3 Slots of the subrack...........................................................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-4 Position of the OTUs in the OptiX OSN 6800..................................................................................4-7

Figure 4-5 Position of the multiplexer and demultiplexer unit.........................................................................4-10


Figure 4-6 Position of the optical add/drop multiplexer unit............................................................................4-11
Figure 5-1 Software architecture of the OptiX OSN 6800 .................................................................................5-2

Figure 6-1 Schematic diagram of DWDM OTM equipment with the optical multiplexer unit and the optical
demultiplexer unit ...............................................................................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-2 Schematic diagram of DWDM OADM equipment with the optical multiplex unit and the optical
demultiplex unit ..................................................................................................................................................6-4
Figure 6-3 Schematic diagram of DWDM OADM equipment with OADM boards..........................................6-5

Figure 6-4 Schematic diagram of ROADM equipment with the WSM9 board and WSD9 board .....................6-7
Figure 6-5 Schematic diagram of ROADM equipment with the ROAM boards ...............................................6-9
Figure 6-6 Schematic diagram of ROADM equipment with the RMU9 board and WSD9 board ...................6-10

Figure 6-7 Schematic diagram of DWDM OLA equipment.............................................................................6-11

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary ix


OptiX OSN 6800
Figures Product Description

Figure 7-1 Schematic diagram of CWDM OTM node .......................................................................................7-3

Figure 7-2 Schematic diagram of CWDM FOADM node .................................................................................7-4


Figure 8-1 ROADM node by ROAM boards .....................................................................................................8-3
Figure 8-2 Intra-ring grooming ..........................................................................................................................8-3

Figure 8-3 Service grooming at node A..............................................................................................................8-4


Figure 8-4 Service grooming at node B..............................................................................................................8-5
Figure 8-5 Service grooming at node C..............................................................................................................8-6

Figure 8-6 ROADM node by WSD9 boards and RMU9 boards ........................................................................8-7
Figure 8-7 Service grooming at node A..............................................................................................................8-8
Figure 8-8 Service grooming at node B..............................................................................................................8-9

Figure 8-9 Service grooming at node C............................................................................................................8-10


Figure 8-10 ROADM node by WSD9 boards and WSM9 boards....................................................................8-11
Figure 8-11 Service grooming at node A..........................................................................................................8-12

Figure 8-12 Service grooming at node B..........................................................................................................8-13


Figure 8-13 Service grooming at node C..........................................................................................................8-14
Figure 8-14 Inter-ring grooming ROADM node ..............................................................................................8-16

Figure 8-15 Inter-ring grooming.......................................................................................................................8-17


Figure 8-16 Grooming from west to east..........................................................................................................8-18
Figure 8-17 Grooming from west to north .......................................................................................................8-19

Figure 8-18 Grooming from west to south .......................................................................................................8-20


Figure 8-19 Slots in the OptiX OSN 6800 .......................................................................................................8-21
Figure 9-1 Working principle of optical line protection .....................................................................................9-5
Figure 9-2 Application of optical line protection (normal).................................................................................9-6
Figure 9-3 Application of optical line protection (switching) ............................................................................9-6
Figure 9-4 Working principle of Intra-board 1+1 protection (OTU) ..................................................................9-8
Figure 9-5 Working principle of intra-board 1+1 protection (OLP)...................................................................9-9
Figure 9-6 Application of Intra-board 1+1 protection (normal) .......................................................................9-10
Figure 9-7 Application of Intra-board 1+1 protection (switching) ...................................................................9-10
Figure 9-8 Working principle of client-side 1+1 protection .............................................................................9-12
Figure 9-9 Application of client-side 1+1 protection (normal).........................................................................9-13
Figure 9-10 Application of client-side 1+1 protection (switching) ..................................................................9-13

Figure 9-11 Working principle of the SW SNCP..............................................................................................9-15


Figure 9-12 Working principle of the ODUk SNCP.........................................................................................9-16

x Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Figure 9-13 Application of the subnetwork connect protection (normal).........................................................9-17

Figure 9-14 Application of the subnetwork connect protection (switching) ....................................................9-18


Figure 9-15 Network management protection in ring network (a certain section fails) ...................................9-19
Figure 9-16 Network management through the normal supervisory channel...................................................9-19

Figure 9-17 Network management through the DCN supervisory channel......................................................9-20


Figure 9-18 Supervision over OptiX transmission network .............................................................................9-20
Figure 10-1 Flatness of the optical power at the receive site when APE is not activated.................................10-2

Figure 10-2 Flatness of the optical power at the receive site when APE is activated.......................................10-2
Figure 10-3 APE networking with M40V as the detection board.....................................................................10-3
Figure 10-4 APE networking with WSM9 as the detection board....................................................................10-4

Figure 10-5 System power with ALC inactivated ............................................................................................10-5


Figure 10-6 System power with ALC activated ...............................................................................................10-5
Figure 10-7 Optical power relationship between two nodes ............................................................................10-7

Figure 10-8 Flow chart of NE abnormity checking (gain mode)......................................................................10-8


Figure 10-9 Flow chart of ALC link pre-adjustment ........................................................................................10-9
Figure 10-10 Flow chart of ALC link adjustment ..........................................................................................10-10

Figure 10-11 Networking of ALC application................................................................................................10-11


Figure 10-12 Function description of the IPA ................................................................................................10-13
Figure 11-1 Signal flow of the OSC between three stations in chain networking ............................................ 11-5

Figure 11-2 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead ..................................................................... 11-6
Figure C-1 Raman amplifier gain spectrum ...................................................................................................... C-5
Figure C-2 Raman amplification application in OptiX OSN 6800 system ....................................................... C-6

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xi


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Tables

Table 2-1 Service access types............................................................................................................................2-4


Table 2-2 Ability of service access .....................................................................................................................2-5
Table 2-3 Management and auxiliary interfaces .................................................................................................2-5

Table 2-4 Service protection classifications .......................................................................................................2-6


Table 2-5 Performance monitoring of access services........................................................................................2-7
Table 2-6 Network performance monitoring ......................................................................................................2-8

Table 4-1 Full configuration of cabinets of different heights..............................................................................4-3


Table 4-2 Functional units ..................................................................................................................................4-5
Table 4-3 Functions of OTUs .............................................................................................................................4-7

Table 4-4 Functions of the tributary units...........................................................................................................4-9


Table 4-5 Functions of the line unit ....................................................................................................................4-9
Table 4-6 Functions of the cross-connect unit ....................................................................................................4-9

Table 4-7 Functions of the multiplexer and demultiplexer unit........................................................................4-10


Table 4-8 Functions of the optical add/drop multiplexer unit...........................................................................4-11
Table 4-9 Functions of the reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit ..........................................4-12

Table 4-10 Functions of the optical amplifier unit............................................................................................4-13


Table 4-11 Functions of the system control and communication unit...............................................................4-13
Table 4-12 Functions of the OSC unit ..............................................................................................................4-14

Table 4-13 Functions of the optical protection unit ..........................................................................................4-15


Table 4-14 Functions of the spectrum analyzer units .......................................................................................4-15
Table 4-15 Functions of the variable optical attenuator units ...........................................................................4-16

Table 8-1 Services supported by the OTU board integrated grooming.............................................................8-21


Table 8-2 Services supported by the OTU board distributed grooming. ..........................................................8-22
Table 9-1 Classification of network level protection schemes............................................................................9-3

Table 9-2 Protection types supported by the OptiX OSN 6800 ..........................................................................9-3
Table 9-3 Boards used to achieve the optical line protection..............................................................................9-4

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xiii


OptiX OSN 6800
Tables Product Description

Table 9-4 Boards used to achieve the Intra-board 1+1 protection ......................................................................9-7

Table 9-5 Boards used to achieve the client-side 1+1 protection......................................................................9-11


Table 9-6 Boards used to achieve the wavelength cross-connection protection ...............................................9-14
Table 11-1 Description of the functional interfaces of the SCC in the OptiX OSN 6800 system..................... 11-3

Table 11-2 Interface function of EFI of the OptiX OSN 6800.......................................................................... 11-4
Table 11-3 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC................................................................... 11-6
Table 11-4 Definition of alarms for the OptiX OSN 6800 system.................................................................... 11-7

Table 11-5 Alarm classification on the T2000 for OptiX OSN 6800 system.................................................... 11-8
Table 12-1 Cabinet specifications.....................................................................................................................12-3
Table 12-2 Subrack specifications ....................................................................................................................12-3

Table 12-3 DCM frame specifications..............................................................................................................12-4


Table 12-4 Fiber-spooling frame specifications................................................................................................12-4
Table 12-5 Nominal central wavelength and frequency of DWDM system .....................................................12-4

Table 12-6 Nominal central wavelengths of CWDM system ...........................................................................12-6


Table 12-7 Specifications of optical module at the client side of the LSX .......................................................12-7
Table 12-8 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LSX.........................................................12-8

Table 12-9 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LSXR ......................................................12-9
Table 12-10 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the L4G.............................................12-10
Table 12-11 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the L4G ..................................................... 12-11

Table 12-12 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LDGD .........................................12-12
Table 12-13 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LDGD .................................................12-13
Table 12-14 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LDGD .................................................12-14
Table 12-15 GE Specifications of optical module at the client side of the LDGS..........................................12-15
Table 12-16 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LDGS..................................................12-16
Table 12-17 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LDGS ..................................................12-17
Table 12-18 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the LQMD......................................12-18
Table 12-19 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LQMD ........................................12-19
Table 12-20 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LQMD ................................................12-20
Table 12-21 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LQMD.................................................12-21
Table 12-22 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the LQMS.......................................12-22
Table 12-23 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LQMS .........................................12-23

Table 12-24 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LQMS .................................................12-24
Table 12-25 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LQMS .................................................12-25

xiv Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Table 12-26 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the LWXD ......................................12-26

Table 12-27 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LWXD.........................................12-27
Table 12-28 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LWXD.................................................12-28
Table 12-29 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LWXD.................................................12-29

Table 12-30 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the LWXS.......................................12-30
Table 12-31 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LWXS .........................................12-31
Table 12-32 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LWXS .................................................12-32

Table 12-33 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LWXS .................................................12-33
Table 12-34 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the LWX2.......................................12-34
Table 12-35 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LWX2 .........................................12-35

Table 12-36 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LWX2 .................................................12-36
Table 12-37 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LWX2..................................................12-37
Table 12-38 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the TQM.........................................12-38

Table 12-39 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the TQM ...........................................12-39
Table 12-40 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the TDG ............................................12-40
Table 12-41 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the TQS ..........................................12-41

Table 12-42 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the NS2 .....................................................12-42
Table 12-43 M40 board specifications............................................................................................................12-43
Table 12-44 MV40 board specifications.........................................................................................................12-43

Table 12-45 D40 board specifications ............................................................................................................12-44


Table 12-46 D40V board specifications .........................................................................................................12-44
Table 12-47 FIU board specifications.............................................................................................................12-45
Table 12-48 MR2 board specifications ...........................................................................................................12-45
Table 12-49 MR4 board specifications ...........................................................................................................12-46
Table 12-50 MR8 board specifications ...........................................................................................................12-46
Table 12-51 CMR2 board specifications ........................................................................................................12-47
Table 12-52 CMR4 board specifications ........................................................................................................12-48
Table 12-53 ROAM board specifications .......................................................................................................12-48
Table 12-54 WSM9 board specifications........................................................................................................12-49
Table 12-55 WSD9 board specifications ........................................................................................................12-49
Table 12-56 RMU9 board specifications ........................................................................................................12-50

Table 12-57 OAU1board specifications..........................................................................................................12-50


Table 12-58 OBU1 board specifications.........................................................................................................12-51

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xv


OptiX OSN 6800
Tables Product Description

Table 12-59 CRPC board specifications .........................................................................................................12-52

Table 12-60 SC1 board specifications ............................................................................................................12-52


Table 12-61 SC2 board specifications ............................................................................................................12-53
Table 12-62 OLP board specifications............................................................................................................12-53

Table 12-63 SCS board specifications ............................................................................................................12-53


Table 12-64 DCP board specifications............................................................................................................12-54
Table 12-65 MCA4 board specifications ........................................................................................................12-54

Table 12-66 MCA8 board specifications ........................................................................................................12-55


Table 12-67 VA1 board specifications ............................................................................................................12-55
Table 12-68 VA4 board specifications ............................................................................................................12-55

Table 12-69 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of L-band (G.652 fiber) ....12-56
Table 12-70 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (G.655 LEAF fiber)
.........................................................................................................................................................................12-56
Table A-1 Requirements on climate environment..............................................................................................A-3

Table A-2 Requirements on the density of mechanically active substance........................................................A-4


Table A-3 Requirements on the density of chemical active substance ..............................................................A-4
Table A-4 Requirements on mechanical stress ..................................................................................................A-4

Table A-5 Requirements on climate environment..............................................................................................A-5


Table A-6 Requirements on the density of mechanically active substance........................................................A-6
Table A-7 Requirements on the density of chemical active substance ..............................................................A-6

Table A-8 Requirements on mechanical stress ..................................................................................................A-6


Table A-9 Requirements on temperature, humidity ...........................................................................................A-7
Table A-10 Other requirements on climate environment...................................................................................A-7

Table A-11 Requirements on the density of mechanically active substance......................................................A-8


Table A-12 Requirements on the density of chemical active substance ............................................................A-8
Table A-13 Requirements on mechanical stress ................................................................................................A-8

Table B-1 OptiX OSN 6800 equipment unit information.................................................................................. B-1

xvi Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description About This Document

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Content

C.4 Raman Amplification................................................................................................................................... C-5


C.5 CWDM Technology..................................................................................................................................... C-6

D Compliant Standards ............................................................................................................. D-1


D.1 ITU-T Recommendations............................................................................................................................D-1
D.2 IEEE Standards............................................................................................................................................D-3
D.3 Laser Security Standards .............................................................................................................................D-3
D.4 Security Standards.......................................................................................................................................D-4
D.5 Environment Related Standards ..................................................................................................................D-4
D.6 International Standards................................................................................................................................D-4

E Glossary ...................................................................................................................................... E-1


F Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................. F-1

Index ................................................................................................................................................ i-1

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary vii


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
The OptiX OSN 6800 Product Description describes the functions, features, specifications
and network application of the equipment.
This document provides both introductory information and detailed interface parameters.

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 6800 V100R001


OptiX iManager T2000 V200R004C02

Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are:
z Network Design and Planning Engineers
z Installer
z Commissioning Engineers
z Field Maintenance
z Network Monitors
z Data Configuration
z Network Administrators
z Maintenance Engineers

Organization
This document consists of twelve chapters and is organized as follows.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1


OptiX OSN 6800
About This Document Product Description

Chapter Description

1 Network Application This chapter describes the system architecture, position in


the network hierarchy, networking and applications of the
OptiX OSN 6800.
2 Product Functions This chapter describes the optical layer technology, the
electrical layer technology, the access service, the
management and auxiliary interface, the protection, the
performance monitoring and the NM system of the OptiX
OSN 6800.
3 Product Features This chapter describes the OTN technology, optical layer
grooming, electrical layer grooming, the technical features
of the WDM transmission system and the upgrade and
maintenance features.
4 Hardware Architecture This chapter describes the cabinet, the subrack and the
function units of the OptiX OSN 6800.
5 Software Architecture This chapter describes the communication protocols and
interfaces, board software, NE software and network
management system of the OptiX OSN 6800.
6 DWDM System This chapter describes the functions, functional units and
Configuration signal flow of OTM node, FOADM node, ROADM node
and OLA node of DWDM system.
7 CWDM System This chapter describes the functions, functional units and
Configuration signal flow of OTM node and OADM node of CWDM
system.
8 Grooming of This chapter describes how to realize dynamic optical layer
Wavelengths and Services grooming and electrical layer grooming.
9 Protection This chapter describes the equipment level protection, the
network level protection and the network management
channel of the OptiX OSN 6800.
10 Management of Optical This chapter describes the implementation and application
Power of APE, ALC and IPA.
11 Operation, This chapter describes the principle and the scheme of the
Administration and operation, administration and maintenance of the OptiX
Maintenance OSN 6800.
12 Technical Specifications This chapter describes the technical specifications and
indices.
Appendix A Environment This appendix describes the performance specifications for
Requirements optical interface, power source requirement,
electromagnetic compatibility and environment
requirement.
Appendix B Power This appendix lists the power consumption, weight and
Consumption, Weight and slots of all boards.
Slots of Boards

2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description About This Document

Chapter Description

Appendix C Technology This chapter describes the advanced technologies of the


Introduction OptiX OSN 6800, including OTN, FEC, EDFA, Raman
amplification and CWDM technologies.
Appendix D Compliant This chapter lists the standards that the OptiX OSN 6800 is
Standards compliant with.
Appendix E Glossary This chapter lists the terms used in this manual.
Appendix F Acronyms and This chapter lists the abbreviations and acronyms
Abbreviations mentioned in this manual.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not


avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk


which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not


avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and
performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save


you time.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or


supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions
Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.


Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in
boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3


OptiX OSN 6800
About This Document Product Description

Convention Description
Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.

Command Conventions
Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.


Italic Command arguments are in italic.
[] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are
optional.
{ x | y | ... } Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets
and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can
be selected.

GUI Conventions
Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the “>”
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Diagram Conventions
Convention Description

Indicates the flow of optical signals.


Indicates the flow of electrical signals.
Indicates an optical module.

Indicates an electrical module.

4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description About This Document

Convention Description

All modules of a board are inside such a block in bold.

Keyboard Operation
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing
Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed
concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operation
Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without


moving the pointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and
quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

Update History
Updates in Issue 01 (2007-02-14)
Initial field trial release

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Contents

1 Network Application.................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 System Architecture ......................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Position in Networks .....................................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Networking and Applications........................................................................................................................1-5
1.3.1 Point-to-Point Network ........................................................................................................................1-5
1.3.2 Chain Network .....................................................................................................................................1-5
1.3.3 Ring Network.......................................................................................................................................1-6
1.3.4 MESH Network ...................................................................................................................................1-7

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Figures

Figure 1-1 OptiX OSN 6800 system architecture...............................................................................................1-2


Figure 1-2 Position of the OptiX OSN 6800 in the network hierarchy ..............................................................1-4
Figure 1-3 Point-to-point network......................................................................................................................1-5

Figure 1-4 Chain network...................................................................................................................................1-5


Figure 1-5 Ring network ....................................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 1-6 Ring with chain.................................................................................................................................1-6

Figure 1-7 Tangent rings ....................................................................................................................................1-7


Figure 1-8 Intersecting rings ..............................................................................................................................1-7
Figure 1-9 MESH network .................................................................................................................................1-8

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 1 Network Application

1 Network Application

About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

Section Describes

1.1 System Architecture System architecture of the OptiX OSN 6800.


1.2 Position in Networks Position of the OptiX OSN 6800 in networks.
1.3 Networking and Networking and applications of the OptiX OSN 6800.
Applications

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-1


OptiX OSN 6800
1 Network Application Product Description

1.1 System Architecture


The OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform (OptiX OSN 6800 for short) is
future-oriented according to the development trend of metropolitan area network (MAN) with
IP as the core. With brand-new architecture, it achieves dynamic optical layer grooming and
flexible electrical layer grooming. It also has features such as high integration, high reliability
and multiple services. Figure 1-1 shows its architecture.

Figure 1-1 OptiX OSN 6800 system architecture

Control plane based on GMPLS

Optical layer : L0 FOADM/ROADM

Line-side processing

Colored interface
O
Electrical layer : L1
T Electrical layer grooming
U

Electrical layer : L2 Packet

Client service processing

GMPLS: Generalized multiprotocal label switching

Figure 1-1 shows the overall architecture of the OptiX OSN 6800.
L0 is the optical layer. L1 and L2 are electrical layers.
Distribution solutions of medium wavelength resource of WDM equipment include fixed
optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM) and reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer
(ROADM).
L1 electrical layer supports the grooming of GE service, Any service and ODU1 signals. L2
electrical layer supports switching based on VLAN and Stack VLAN.

1-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 1 Network Application

1.2 Position in Networks


The OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 3800 are both intelligent optical transport
platforms. The OptiX OSN 6800 is for area backbones, local networks, metropolitan
convergence layers and metropolitan core layers. The OptiX OSN 3800 is for metropolitan
convergence layers and metropolitan access layers.
The OptiX OSN 6800 uses dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) or coarse
wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) technologies to achieve transparent transmission
with multiple services and large capacity.
The OptiX OSN 6800 supports a variety of networking modes, including
z Point-to-point network
z Chain network
z Ring network
z MESH network
It may also work with other WDM, SDH/SONET equipment to offer a complete Metro WDM
solution.
Figure 1-2 shows the position of the OptiX OSN 6800 in the overall network hierarchy.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-3


OptiX OSN 6800
1 Network Application Product Description

Figure 1-2 Position of the OptiX OSN 6800 in the network hierarchy

Area backbones

Short long-hual

Local networks and


metropolitan core layers

Metropolitan convergence
layers and metropolitan
access layers

OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Enterprise

Multi-tenant building Internet data center Bank

Intelligent residential area

1-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 1 Network Application

1.3 Networking and Applications


The OptiX OSN 6800 supports point-to-point network, chain network, ring network and
MESH network.

1.3.1 Point-to-Point Network


Point-to-point network is the basic application of the OptiX OSN 6800.
It is used for end-to-end service transmission. The other network modes are based on
point-to-point mode which is the most basic network.
Figure 1-3 shows a point-to-point network composed of the OptiX OSN 6800.

Figure 1-3 Point-to-point network

: Client-side equipment : OTM

1.3.2 Chain Network


Chain network with OADM(s) is the suitable topology when it is required to add/drop some
wavelengths while passing others on.
Figure 1-4 shows a chain network composed of the OptiX OSN 6800.

Figure 1-4 Chain network

: Client-side equipment : OTM : OADM

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-5


OptiX OSN 6800
1 Network Application Product Description

1.3.3 Ring Network


Network security and reliability are two key factors that indicate the quality of the services
provided by network operators.
Because of its excellent survivability, ring network is a dominant networking mode in MAN
DWDM network planning. It can diversify into complex network structures such as tangent
rings, intersecting rings, and ring with chain.
Figure 1-5 shows a ring network composed of the OptiX OSN 6800.

Figure 1-5 Ring network

: OADM

Figure 1-6 shows the ring-with-chain topology by OptiX OSN 6800 OADMs.

Figure 1-6 Ring with chain

: OTM : OADM

Figure 1-7 shows the tangent-ring topology by OptiX OSN 6800 OADMs.

1-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 1 Network Application

Figure 1-7 Tangent rings

: OADM

Figure 1-8 shows the intersecting-ring topology by OptiX OSN 6800 OADMs.

Figure 1-8 Intersecting rings

: OADM

1.3.4 MESH Network


A large number of nodes are connected by straight routes in a MESH network. As a result,
MESH networks have no node bottleneck and ensure unblocked services by alternative routes
during equipment failure. In a MESH network, more than one route is available between two
nodes so that the service transmission is highly reliable. As a result, the MESH topology is a
mainstream mode for intelligent optical networks. The MESH topology is flexible with good
expandability. Figure 1-9 shows the MESH topology by OptiX OSN 6800 OADMs.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-7


OptiX OSN 6800
1 0BNetwork Application Product Description

Figure 1-9 MESH network

: OADM

1-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Contents

2 Product Functions ......................................................................................................................2-1


2.1 Optical Layer Technology .............................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.1 Wavelength Grooming Ability .............................................................................................................2-2
2.1.2 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.3 Transmission Capacity .........................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.4 Transmission Distance .........................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.5 Networking Capability.........................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Electrical Layer Technology..........................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.1 Cross Connection Granularity..............................................................................................................2-3
2.2.2 Cross Connection Ability .....................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.3 L2 Electrical Layer Switching Ability .................................................................................................2-3
2.3 Service Access...............................................................................................................................................2-4
2.3.1 Types of Service Access.......................................................................................................................2-4
2.3.2 Ability of Service Access .....................................................................................................................2-5
2.4 Management and Auxiliary Interfaces...........................................................................................................2-5
2.5 Guaranteed Reliability...................................................................................................................................2-6
2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection.................................................................................................................2-6
2.5.2 Network Level Protection ....................................................................................................................2-6
2.6 Performance Monitoring ...............................................................................................................................2-7
2.6.1 Performance Monitoring of Access Services .......................................................................................2-7
2.6.2 Performance Monitoring of Network...................................................................................................2-8
2.7 Network Management System ......................................................................................................................2-8
2.7.1 T2000 ...................................................................................................................................................2-9
2.7.2 Web LCT..............................................................................................................................................2-9
2.7.3 Toolkit ..................................................................................................................................................2-9
2.7.4 Simple Network Management Protocol ...............................................................................................2-9
2.7.5 Management Capability .......................................................................................................................2-9
2.7.6 Transmission of Network Management Information ...........................................................................2-9

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Tables

Table 2-1 Service access types............................................................................................................................2-4


Table 2-2 Ability of service access .....................................................................................................................2-5
Table 2-3 Management and auxiliary interfaces .................................................................................................2-5

Table 2-4 Service protection classifications .......................................................................................................2-6


Table 2-5 Performance monitoring of access services........................................................................................2-7
Table 2-6 Network performance monitoring ......................................................................................................2-8

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 2 Product Functions

2 Product Functions

About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

Section Describes

2.1 Optical Layer Technology Optical layer technology of the OptiX OSN 6800,
including grooming ability, technical specification,
transmission capacity, transmission distance, networking
capability, integrated system and open system.
2.2 Electrical Layer Electrical layer technology of the OptiX OSN 6800,
Technology including cross connection granularity, cross connection
ability, and L2 cross connection ability.
2.3 Service Access Access service type and the access ability of the OptiX
OSN 6800.
2.4 Management and Management and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN
Auxiliary Interfaces 6800.
2.5 Guaranteed Reliability Network level protection and equipment level protection
of the OptiX OSN 6800.
2.6 Performance Monitoring Performance monitoring based on access services and that
based on the network of the OptiX OSN 6800.
2.7 Network Management Functions and features of the NM system.
System

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-1


OptiX OSN 6800
2 Product Functions Product Description

2.1 Optical Layer Technology


The OptiX OSN 6800 supports many types of optical layer technologies, including optical
layer grooming, WDM multiplexing, and integrated and open systems.

2.1.1 Wavelength Grooming Ability


Distribution solutions of medium wavelength resource of WDM equipment include fixed
optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM) and reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer
(ROADM).
The optical layer grooming realized by ROADM can be classified into intra-ring grooming
and inter-ring grooming, or into two-dimensional grooming and multi-dimensional grooming.
Dimension refers to transmission direction. Two-dimensional grooming refers to wavelength
grooming in two transmission directions. Multi-dimensional grooming refers to wavelength
grooming in multiple transmission directions.
For details, refer to Chapter 8 "Grooming of Wavelengths and Services".

2.1.2 Technical Specifications


The OptiX OSN 6800 is of two WDM specifications:
z DWDM with a channel spacing of 100 GHz. It applies to services of 2.5 Gbit/s, 5 Gbit/s,
10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/s.
z CWDM with a channel spacing of 20 nm. It only applies to services rated at 2.5 Gbit/s
and lower.

2.1.3 Transmission Capacity


z The OptiX OSN 6800 DWDM system can access up to 40 wavelengths. Each
wavelength supports a maximum rate of 40 Gbit/s.
z The OptiX OSN 6800 CWDM system can access up to 18 wavelengths. Each
wavelength supports a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

2.1.4 Transmission Distance


z For 40 Gbit/s rate, supports a maximum of 8x22 dB transmission without electrical
regenerator.
z For 2.5 Gbit/s, 5 Gbit/s, and 10 Gbit/s rate, supports a maximum of 16x22 dB
transmission without electrical regenerator.
z For 2.5 Gbit/s, 5 Gbit/s, and 10 Gbit/s rate, supports 1x40 dB single-span ultra long
distance transmission.
z For CWDM systems, supports a maximum of 80 km transmission distance.

2.1.5 Networking Capability


The OptiX OSN 6800 supports point-to-point, chain, ring and MESH networking modes.
It can also be utilized in networks with other WDM, SDH/SONET equipment to realize a
complete metropolitan transmission solution.

2-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 2 Product Functions

2.1.6 Integrated System and Open System Compatibility


There are two types of DWDM systems:
z Integrated DWDM system
z Open DWDM system
The open DWDM system is configured with OTUs to convert non-standard wavelengths into
ITU-T G.694.1-compliant wavelengths.
The integrated DWDM system does not need OTUs when its client-side equipment (for
example, the SDH equipment) has optical transmitter interfaces that comply with ITU-T
G.694.1.

2.2 Electrical Layer Technology


The OptiX OSN 6800 provides electrical grooming of GE services, ODU1 signals and Any
services. It provides L2 electrical layer switching based on VLAN and Stack VLAN.

2.2.1 Cross Connection Granularity


The OptiX OSN 6800 provides two types of electrical grooming:
z Integrated grooming of GE services and ODU1 signals
z Distributed grooming of GE services, ODU1 signals and Any services

2.2.2 Cross Connection Ability


The OptiX OSN 6800 supports integrated grooming of GE services or that of ODU1 signals
realized by the XCS:
z For GE services, supports a maximum of 160 Gbit/s cross grooming capacity.
z For ODU1 services, supports a maximum of 320 Gbit/s cross grooming capacity.
The OptiX OSN 6800 supports distributed grooming of GE services, ODU1 signals and of
Any services realized by the board in the paired slot:
z For GE services, supports a maximum of 5 Gbit/s cross grooming capacity.
z For Any services, supports a maximum of 10 Gbit/s cross grooming capacity.
z For ODU1services, supports a maximum of 10 Gbit/s cross grooming capacity.

2.2.3 L2 Electrical Layer Switching Ability


The OptiX OSN 6800 supports L2 electrical layer switching based on VLAN and Stack
VLAN.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-3


OptiX OSN 6800
2 Product Functions Product Description

2.3 Service Access


The OptiX OSN 6800 supports synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) service, synchronous
optical network (SONET), Ethernet service, storage area network (SAN) service, optical
transmission network (OTN) service, video service and others.

2.3.1 Types of Service Access


Table 2-1 gives the details about the service access types of the OptiX OSN 6800.

Table 2-1 Service access types

Service Category Service Type Reference Standard

SDH/POS/ATM STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, ITU-T G.707


STM-64, STM-256 ITU-T G.691
ITU-T G.957
SONET OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, GR-253-CORE
OC-192, OC-768 GR-1377-CORE
ANSI T1.105
Ethernet service FE IEEE 802.3z
GE IEEE 802.3ae
10GE WAN, 10GE LAN IEEE 802.3u
SAN service ESCON ANSI X3.296
FICON, FICON Express ANSI X3.303
FC50, FC100, FC200,
FC1200
OTN service OTU1, OTU2, OTU 5G ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.959.1
Video service and HDTV, DVB-ASI, SDI, EN 50083-9
others FDDI SMPTE 292M
SMPTE 259M
FE: Fast Ethernet
GE: Gigabit Ethernet
ESCON: Enterprise Systems Connection
FICON: Fiber Connection
FC: Fiber Channel
HDTV: High Definition TV
DVB-ASI: Digital Video Broadcasting-asynchronous Serial Interface
FDDI: Fiber Distributed Data Interface

2-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 2 Product Functions

2.3.2 Ability of Service Access


The ability of service access is listed in Table 2-2.

Table 2-2 Ability of service access

Service Type Maximum of Service Maximum of Service


Amount for a Board Amount for a Subrack

GE 6 84
10GE 1 17
STM-64/OC-192 1 17
STM-16/OC-48 4 28
STM-4/STM-1/OC-12/O 4 56
C-3
Any service (16 2 34
Mbit/s–2.5 Gbit/s)
OTU1 4 28
OTU2 1 17

2.4 Management and Auxiliary Interfaces


The management and auxiliary interfaces supported by the OptiX OSN 6800 is listed in Table
2-3.

Table 2-3 Management and auxiliary interfaces


Interface Type Description

Management interface OAM interface (SERIAL)


Commissioning interface(COM)
Inter-subrack communication interface (ETH3)
NM cascading interface (NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2)a
NM interface (NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2)a
Inter-subrack communication interface (ETH1/ETH2)
Alarm interface Alarm output and cascading interface (ALMO1–ALMO4)
Alarm input interface (ALMI1/ALMI2)
Subrack alarm output and cascading interface (LAMP1/LAMP2)
a: When NM_ETH1 is used as an NM cascading interface, NM_ETH2 must serve as an NM interface.
Similarly, when NM_ETH1 is used as an NM interface, NM_ETH2 must serve as an NM cascading interface.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-5


OptiX OSN 6800
2 Product Functions Product Description

2.5 Guaranteed Reliability


The OptiX OSN 6800 provides equipment level protection and network level protection.

2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection


The OptiX OSN 6800 provides SCC board 1+1 protection, cross-connect board 1+1
protection, input power supply 1+1 backup and secondary power protection for OTU.
z SCC board 1+1 protection: There are two SCC boards in the subrack. One of them is the
working SCC and the other is the protection SCC.
z Cross-connect board 1+1 protection: There are two XCS boards in the subrack. One of
them is the working SCC and the other is the protection SCC.
z Input power supply 1+1 backup: The power supply system of the OptiX OSN 6800
provides two external –48V/–60V DC power supplies to be mutual backup. A fault in
one of the external –48V/–60V power supplies does not affect the normal working.
z Secondary power protection for OTU: The OptiX OSN 6800 provides secondary power
protection for OTU by SCC board, with a solution of distributed supply and integrated
protection.

2.5.2 Network Level Protection


The OptiX OSN 6800 offers three ways to protect a network:
z Optical channel protection
z Optical line protection
z Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP)
There are two optical channel protection schemes:
z Intra-board 1+1 protection
z Client-side 1+1 protection
There are three SNCP schemes:
z Sub-wavelength SNCP
z ODUk SNCP
z VLAN SNCP
The network level protection classifications are listed in Table 2-4.

Table 2-4 Service protection classifications

Category Sub-Category Description

Optical line Optical line protection It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the OLP
protection board, to protect line fibers between adjacent stations by using
diverse routing.
Optical channel Client-side 1+1 It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the
protection protection OLP/DCP/SCS board, to protect the OTU board and the OCh
fibers.

2-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 2 Product Functions

Category Sub-Category Description

Intra-board 1+1 It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the
protection OTU/OLP/DCP board, to protect the OCh fibers by using
diverse routing.
SNCP protection SW SNCP protection It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the
electrical layer grooming, to protect the line board and the OCh
fibers. The cross-connect granularity is GE services or Any
services.
ODUk SNCP protection It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the
electrical layer grooming, to protect the line board and the OCh
fibers. The cross-connect granularity is ODU1 signals.
VLAN SNCP protection It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of L2
module, to protect the line board and the OCh fibers. The
protection granularity is the service with VLAN on the
client-side port.

2.6 Performance Monitoring


The OptiX OSN 6800 provides performance monitoring of access services and of the
network.

2.6.1 Performance Monitoring of Access Services


Table 2-5 lists the performance monitoring of access services provided by the OptiX OSN
6800.

Table 2-5 Performance monitoring of access services


Service Category Monitored Item Service Type

Data services RMON statistics of GE


Ethernet performance 10GE
SDH/SONET B1 bit parity error STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64
OC-3/OC-12/OC-48/OC-192
OTN SM-BIP8 bit parity error OTU1/OTU2
TCM-BIP8 bit parity error
PM-BIP8 bit parity error
SAN services 8B/10B code violation FC-50/FC-100/FC-200
ESCON
FICON/FICON Express
Video services 8B/10B code violation DVB-ASI

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-7


OptiX OSN 6800
2 Product Functions Product Description

2.6.2 Performance Monitoring of Network


Table 2-6 shows the performance monitoring of the network provided by the OptiX OSN
6800.

Table 2-6 Network performance monitoring


Type Monitored Item Implementation Board
a b
OTS /OMS optical signal Optical power Fiber amplifier units, optical
performance monitoring multiplexer/demultiplexer, ROADM,
optical protection unit, variable optical
attenuator (VOA)c unit and case-shaped
Raman amplifier units provide real-time
detection.
OTS/OMS signal Wavelength value, optical power of Fiber amplifier units, optical
in-service spectrum each wavelength, ONSRd multiplexer/demultiplexer, ROADMe,
analysis and Raman amplifier units provide MON
port. The spectrum analyzer unit can be
connected to this port to monitor the
spectrum of the main path.
OCHf optical signal Input/output optical power, laser Line-side optical interfaces of all OTUs
performance monitoring temperature, bias current, cooling provide real-time detection.
current
OTN electrical layer signal SM-BIP8 bit error, TCM-BIP 8bit OTUs with OTN line interfaces provide
detection error, PM-BIP8 bit error real-time detection.
a: Optical Transmission Section
b: Optical Multiplex Section
c: The VOA supports optical power detection but is not necessarily adopted in OTS/OMS.
d: Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio
e: The ROAM can detect the optical power of locally input wavelengths but cannot detect OSNR or wavelength value.
f: Optical channel

2.7 Network Management System


Optical transmission network management (NM) system manages all OptiX OSN 6800
systems. With the Qx and CORBA interfaces, the NM system manages, maintains, and tests
the faults, the performance, the configuration and the security of the entire optical
transmission system. The NM system also provides end-to-end management at the user’s
requirement. The NM system improves the network quality, lowers the maintenance cost, and
ensures reasonable utilization of the network resource.
The OptiX OSN 6800 adopts subnet management system of the new generation. Hence, it can
manage and control NEs and the area network. The NM system provides friendly user
interfaces as well as powerful and comprehensive functions. Its software system adopts
assembly technology and object technology so that the application sub-systems can be
tailored at the user’s requirements. This facilitates system expansion.

2-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 2 Product Functions

The OptiX OSN 6800 supports tools such as OptiX iManager T2000, Web LCT, OptiX
Toolkit to manage the entire optical transmission system.

2.7.1 T2000
OptiX iManager T2000 (T2000 for short) is a subnetwork management system (SNMS). In
the telecommunication management network (TMN) architecture, SNMS is located between
the NE level and network level. Therefore, the T2000 supports all functions of NE-level and
part of the network-level management functions.
The T2000 provides the users with single-layer management network solutions to small and
medium-sized transmission networks. Together with the upper-level network management
system (through the standard external interfaces), the T2000 can assist network layer
management system and service layer management system in managing large-scale
transmission networks.

2.7.2 Web LCT


Web local craft terminal (Web LCT) is used to configure and maintain single station. As an
NE level craft terminal, it manages local NEs or remote NEs. With the Web LCT, the user can
use the Web browser of the system, such as Internet Explorer (IE) to manage, maintain and
configure the OptiX OSN 6800.

2.7.3 Toolkit
OptiX Toolkit (Toolkit for short) is a graphical management tool for Huawei optical products.
It remotely operates data and software of the NE. The OptiX Toolkit manages NE data, NE
software, board software, and so on.

2.7.4 Simple Network Management Protocol


The OptiX OSN 6800 supports simple network management protocol (SNMP) .
The SNMP is a standard protocol based on user datagram protocol (UDP).
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides an SNMP compatible management interface. With this
interface, any NM system can access and manage the OptiX OSN 6800.

2.7.5 Management Capability


The OptiX OSN 6800 and the other OptiX products are managed through the same intelligent
network management (NM) system.

2.7.6 Transmission of Network Management Information


The OptiX OSN 6800 communicates with the NM in the following three modes:
z ECC over DCC: The management information is transferred by using the ECC protocol
sharing method.
z IP over DCC: The management information is transferred by using the IP protocol
sharing method.
z OSI over DCC: The management information is transferred by using the OSI protocol
sharing method.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-9


OptiX OSN 6800
2 Product Functions Product Description

ECC over DCC


The ECC protocol is used to transfer the management information between Huawei optical
equipment. When Huawei equipment interworks with third-party equipment, The ECC
protocol is unable to read the management information of the third-part equipment. However,
the ECC protocol can transparently transmit the management information. Users have
centralized management to equipment with the available DCC resources.
The ECC protocol has the following features:
z Supports flexible networking.
z Provides ECC communication after the optical interfaces or network ports between NEs
are connected.
z Transmits the management information of third-party equipment transparently.

IP over DCC
The OptiX OSN 6800 supports the remote operation and maintenance in IP over DCC mode.
The IP over DCC has the following features:
z Adopts the standard TCP/IP protocol, which makes it compatible with other vendor’s
equipment and simplifies the network management.
z Adopts the forwarding function of the third layer in the protocol stack, which makes the
extra overheads or service paths unnecessary.
z Brings flexible networking models.
z Brings simple upgrade modes and great compatibility. It is easy for IP over DCC to work
with new forwarding or multi-protocol features on the application layer.
The IP over DCC provides two remote accessing modes.
z Gateway NE mode
The ECC protocol is used. For remote access, you need to log in to the gateway NE that
connects to the computer directly. Then, you can access other equipment by using the NE
ID. With the IP over DCC feature, this mode can still be used to access an NE remotely.
z Direct connection mode
The IP over DCC feature is used, and the remote NE can be connected directly through
the IP address. You just need to enter the destination IP address in the login interface. For
this mode, however, you need to add in advance the static route or default gateway in the
network NM (T2000) and the NE that needs to be accessed directly.

OSI over DCC


OSI over DCC is used when the OptiX OSN equipment interworks with other optical network
equipment that supports OSI over DCC feature. When third-party equipment exists in the
network, the OSI over DCC feature erases the limits on the networking of multi-vendor
equipment.
OSI over DCC enables more flexible networking by transmitting the management information
transparently at the network layer. Users need not to create extra DCN channels. The available
DCC resource is enough to realize the centralized management to the equipment from
different vendors.

2-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Contents

3 Product Features .........................................................................................................................3-1


3.1 Service Processing and Grooming ................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.1 OTN Processing ...................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.2 Optical Layer Grooming ......................................................................................................................3-3
3.1.3 Electrical Layer Grooming...................................................................................................................3-4
3.2 Features of WDM Transmission Technology ................................................................................................3-5
3.2.1 Expansion.............................................................................................................................................3-5
3.2.2 Supervisory Channel............................................................................................................................3-5
3.2.3 FEC Function .......................................................................................................................................3-5
3.2.4 Tunable Wavelengths ...........................................................................................................................3-6
3.2.5 EDFA Technology................................................................................................................................3-6
3.2.6 Raman Amplification ...........................................................................................................................3-6
3.2.7 Jitter Suppression Function..................................................................................................................3-6
3.2.8 Automatic Laser Shutdown..................................................................................................................3-6
3.2.9 Optical Power Management.................................................................................................................3-9
3.2.10 Main/Slave Subrack ...........................................................................................................................3-9
3.3 Upgrade and Maintenance...........................................................................................................................3-10
3.3.1 Software Package Loading.................................................................................................................3-10
3.3.2 Hot Patch............................................................................................................................................3-10
3.3.3 Pluggable Optical Module .................................................................................................................3-10

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Figures

Figure 3-1 ALS function diagram (the OTU board without service convergence function) ..............................3-7
Figure 3-2 ALS function diagram (the OTU board with service convergence function) ...................................3-8

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 3 Product Features

3 Product Features

About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

Section Describes

3.1 Service Processing and OTN technology, optical layer grooming, and electrical
Grooming layer grooming.
3.2 Features of WDM Technical features of the WDM transmission system.
Transmission Technology
3.3 Upgrade and Maintenance Software package loading function, hot patch function
and pluggable optical modules.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-1


OptiX OSN 6800
3 Product Features Product Description

3.1 Service Processing and Grooming


Adopting the OTN technology, the OptiX OSN 6800 provides dynamic optical layer
grooming and flexible electrical layer grooming.

3.1.1 OTN Processing


Optical transport network (OTN) is a brand-new optical transport technical system defined by
Recommendations such as ITU-T G.872, G.798, and G.709. With complete systems of the
optical layer and of the electrical layer, it has management/monitoring mechanism and
network vitality mechanism for each network layer.
The concept of OTN is from SDH/SONET mechanism (such as, mapping, multiplexing, cross
connection, embedded overhead, protection, FEC, and so on). In this way, the operable and
manageable ability of SDH/SONET is added in the WDM system, endowing the OTN with
both the flexibility of SDH/SONET and high capacity of WDM.

Key Technology
The OptiX OSN 6800 fully supports OTN. Its key technologies are listed below.
z Client service mapping: For customer services whose mapping process has been defined
by Recommendation G.709, the OptiX OSN 6800 adopts mapping process that is
completely compliant to the Recommendation. These services include SDH/SONET
services and Ethernet services. When the service rate is less than the ODU1, the ODU1
is equally divided into 16 time slots to carry the services. Services at different rates are
allocated with different amount of time slots. For example, one time slot carries STM-1
service; four time slots carry STM-4 service; seven time slots carry FC100 service. The
division of OTN payload domain improves the utilization of ODU channels.
z Channel cross connection and multiplexing: The OptiX OSN 6800 currently supports
cross connection of the ODU1 signal and multiplexes four ODU1 signals to ODU2. It
also supports the cross connection of optical layer OCh channel and multiplexes OCh to
OTM-40.123 signals.
z Network protection: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports OTN-defined network protection of
the OMS, OCh, and ODU layer, including OMS 1+1 path protection, OCh SNC/N
protection, and the SNC/N, SNC/I, SNC/S protection of ODU1.
z OAM: The OptiX OSN 6800 fully supports all kinds of administrative overhead defined
by Recommendation G.709. It utilizes GCC byte for ESC management. GCC0, GCC1, or
GCC2 can be chosen to transmit the management information. SM, PM performance
monitoring and reporting is supported. A maximum of six levels of TCM management is
supported. EFC and correction result reporting is supported.

Technical Advantage
With OTN-related technologies, the OptiX OSN 6800 has technical advantages in the
following aspects:
z It adopts OPUk container to realize real transparent adaptation and transmission of any
client services without changing any payload or overhead. It also provides effective
management and service quality monitoring. In addition, it can be compatible with
possible new services in the future.

3-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 3 Product Features

z It adopts asynchronous mapping and multiplexing so that networkwide synchronization


is no longer needed. This eliminates the limitation on synchronization and simplifies the
system design.
z With the cross connection and multiplexing of ODU1 channel, the sub-rate services can
be flexibly groomed between different OCh channels and the client-side ports. This
meets the need for both high utilization of wavelength bandwidth and flexible end-to-end
grooming.
z With the standard FEC by the OTN, it realizes a maximum of 6.2 dB (BER=10E-15)
coding gain. The OSNR tolerance of the optical channel is decreased in this way. In
addition, the distance between electrical regenerators are extended with less system
nodes. This can lower the cost of networking.
z With different TCM monitoring initiation points, different carriers and customers can
monitor the transmission quality of the same service. This is of benefit to service
maintenance and fault locating.

3.1.2 Optical Layer Grooming


Distribution solutions of medium wavelength resource of WDM equipment include:
z Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM)
z Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)
The FOADM solution cannot adjust the distribution of wavelength resource according to the
service development.
The ROADM solution realizes reconfiguration of wavelengths by blocking or
cross-connecting of wavelengths. This turns the static distribution of wavelength resource to
be flexible and dynamic. ROADM with T2000 can remotely and dynamically adjust the status
of wavelength adding/dropping and passing through. A maximum of 40 wavelengths can be
adjusted.
The ROADM solution has advantages as follows:

Easy Planning
z For wavelength distribution
Wavelength resources can be re-distributed among different nodes by changing the
ROADM configuration. This does not affect the existing services.
z For wavelength adjustment
Wavelength services can be adjusted more easily by configuring the tunable OTU.
z For wavelength regeneration
The collision wavelength is switched to the local dropping port and is converted by the
tunable regenerator unit. The wavelength utilization is improved to the best extent in this
way.
z For the network
Phased construction of WDM transport network is supported according to the service
scale. The newly built network does not affect the operation of the existing network. This
allows a reasonable development of WDM transport networks.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-3


OptiX OSN 6800
3 Product Features Product Description

Easy Maintaining
z Remote commissioning and testing
It allows the maintainer to monitor and mange the entire network without presence on
site. This helps to save time and cost of transportation and the network maintenance is
more effective.
z Automatic power management
The system automatically adjusts the network power budget so that the system
performance reaches relative maximum.
z Less maintenance risk with overall protection
Wavelength reconfiguration of the ROADM improves the network reliability.

Easy Managing
z Timely service providing
The WDM transport network based on ROADM can provide new services timely. The
NM system controls the entire process and the deployment of new services is
convenient.
z Automatic initiation of power configuration
After a wavelength is configured, power budget of its path is automatically set. This
saves configuration time and simplifies the adjustment of power budget to a large extent.
z Automatic deployment
Automatic deployment can be realized by the embedded functions of the ROADM such
as power management and wavelength discovery.

3.1.3 Electrical Layer Grooming


The OptiX OSN 6800 provides grooming on L1 electrical layer and L2 electrical layer.
Granularities that can be groomed at L1 electrical layer are GE services, ODU1 signals, and
Any services. Because the electrical layer processing and grooming are added between the
client-side interface signals and the WDM-side ones, wavelength utilization of the line is
improved. In addition, the OptiX OSN 6800 can therefore connect seamlessly to traditional
electrical layer equipment.
The OptiX OSN 6800 supports L2 electrical layer switching based on VLAN and Stack
VLAN. The L4G board realizes basic Ethernet management, including management of the
Ethernet private line (EPL) services, Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) services, the quality
of service (QoS), port basic attribute configuration, and test frames.

3-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 3 Product Features

3.2 Features of WDM Transmission Technology


The OptiX OSN 6800 provides WDM transmission features, such as FEC, tunable
wavelength, automatic laser shutdown, optical power management and maser/slave subrack
mode.

3.2.1 Expansion
The OptiX OSN 6800 adds/drops service through optical terminal multiplexer nodes and
optical add/drop multiplexer nodes. The capacity expansion is flexible and convenient.
z If the OptiX OSN 6800 uses OADM boards, the initial investment is small and capacity
expansion can be done by adding hardware later. At most 40 add/drop channels are
supported.
z If the OptiX OSN 6800 uses the multiplexer and demultiplexer unit, capacity expansion
will not interrupt the existing services. At most 40 add/drop channels are supported.

3.2.2 Supervisory Channel


The supervisory information between OptiX OSN 6800 NEs is transmitted over supervisory
channels. Supervisory channel of the OptiX OSN 6800 can be:
z Optical supervisory channel (OSC)
z Electric supervisory channel (ESC)

In OSC Mode
In OSC mode, the optical supervisory channel unit (SC1/SC2) needs to work with the FIU
board. The wavelength of the supervisory channel is 1510 nm.

In ESC Mode
In ESC mode, the OTU board multiplexes the supervisory information into the service
channel for transmission, demanding no optical supervisory channel units (SC1/SC2).
The OTU board realizes the ESC transmission by using the DCC byte or the associated GCC
byte compliant with ITU-T G.709.
The ESC reduces the investment of the OSC. It also deletes the insertion loss of the FIU. This
lowers the cost and the power budget of optical channels.

3.2.3 FEC Function


Some OTUs of the OptiX OSN 6800 have forward error correction (FEC) function and
advanced forward error correction (AFEC) function.
With the FEC and AFEC function, the system imposes less strict requirements on OSNR in
the receive end. This stretches the transmission distance between the optical amplifier section
and the regenerator section.
In addition, the FEC and AFEC help to reduce bit error rate during the transmission. It also
enhances the transmission quality of DWDM networks.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-5


OptiX OSN 6800
3 Product Features Product Description

3.2.4 Tunable Wavelengths


The OptiX OSN 6800 supports tunable wavelengths. It adopts 10 Gbit/s, 5 Gbit/s and 2.5
Gbit/s OTUs that support tunable wavelengths.
The 10 Gbit/s, 5 Gbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s OTUs support tunable wavelengths in up to 40
channels with 100 GHz spacing.
Besides, the tunable wavelength OTUs can also function as spare parts to substitute OTUs of
different wavelengths. This reduces the amount of OTUs and lowers the cost. When the
wavelength-tunable OTUs work with dynamic optical add/drop multiplexing units, the
dynamic wavelength grooming is realized.

3.2.5 EDFA Technology


The OptiX OSN 6800 DWDM system uses mature Erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)
technology for long haul transmission with no regenerator.
EDFA adopts gain locking technology and transient control technology to make the gain of
each channel independent of the number of channels. Adding or dropping channels does not
bring in burst bit error in the existing channels.

3.2.6 Raman Amplification


Cooperation of Raman amplifier and Erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) realizes wideband
flat gain. The interference of system noise and non-linear effect upon the system is effectively
decreased and the transmission distance is extended.

3.2.7 Jitter Suppression Function


With a jitter suppression unit between the optical receive module and the optical transmit
module, the OptiX OSN 6800 has excellent jitter suppression function.

3.2.8 Automatic Laser Shutdown


The OTU board in the OptiX OSN 6800 system provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
With the ALS function, the OTU board can automatically shut down or turn on the laser based
on the condition of the input optical signals to avoid injury to human bodies.
The ALS function applies only to the output optical interfaces on the WDM side and the client
side of the OTU board. This function can be enabled or disabled through the network
management system, as shown in Figure 3-1 (a) and Figure 3-2 (a).
z OTU board without service convergence function
When no optical signals are input to the receive optical interface on the WDM side of the
OTU board, the OTU automatically shuts down the laser for the output optical interface
on the client side with the ALS function enabled, as shown in Figure 3-1 (b).
When no optical signals are input to the receive optical interface on the client side of the
OTU board, the OTU automatically shuts down the laser for the output optical interface
on the WDM side with the ALS function enabled, as shown in Figure 3-1 (c).
z OTU board with service convergence function
When no optical signals are input to the receive optical interface on the client side of the
opposite OTU board, the output optical interface on the WDM side is not shut down. The

3-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 3 Product Features

information about optical signal loss is sent to the local OTU board through overhead
byte. Then the local OTU board automatically shuts down the laser for the output optical
interface on the corresponding client side, as shown in the Figure 3-2 (b).
When no optical signals are input to the receive optical interface on the WDM side of the
OTU board, the OTU board automatically shuts down all the lasers for the output optical
interface on the client side with the ALS function enabled, as shown in Figure 3-2 (c).
NOTE
z When the system adopts the ESC, the ALS function for the WDM side of each OTU board must be
disabled, because the supervisory signals have already been multiplexed into the transmission
channel for service signals by the OTU boards.
z As for the OTU board that accesses the OTN services, the ALS function for the WDM side is
disabled by default.

Figure 3-1 ALS function diagram (the OTU board without service convergence function)

Tx IN
ALSenabled
OTU
OUT
ALS enabled
Rx OUT

client side WDM side


(a)Configuration of optical interfaces

Automatic laser No input optical


shutdown signals

Tx IN Tx IN
ALS enabled ALS enabled Automatic laser
No input optical
OTU signals OTU shutdown
OUT
ALS enabled ALS enabled
Rx OUT Rx OUT

client side WDM side client side WDM side

(b) No signals received (c) No signals received


on the WDM side on the client side

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-7


OptiX OSN 6800
3 Product Features Product Description

Figure 3-2 ALS function diagram (the OTU board with service convergence function)

Tx
Tx
ALS enabled IN
Tx
Tx
OTU
Rx ALS enabled
Rx OUT
Rx
Rx

client side WDM side

(a)Configuration of optical interfaces

Tx
Rx
Tx
ALS enabled Rx
Tx IN OUT
Rx
Tx Rx
OTU OTU
Rx Tx
Rx OUT IN ALS enabled Tx
Rx Tx
Rx Tx
client side WDM side WDM side client side
No input optical Automatic laser
signals shutdown
(b) No signals received on the
client side of the far end

Tx
Rx
Tx
ALS enabled Rx
Tx IN OUT
Rx
Tx Rx
No input optical
OTU signals OTU
Rx Tx
Rx OUT IN ALS enabled Tx
Rx Tx Automatic laser
Rx Tx
shutdown

client side WDM side WDM side client side

(c) No signals received


on the WDM side

NOTE
The ALS function provided by the OptiX WDM products has no relationship with the ALS mentioned in
ITU-T G.664. The repetition in terms of name and acronym is just a coincidence.

3-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 3 Product Features

3.2.9 Optical Power Management


Intelligent Power Adjustment
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.
In case the optical power signals on one or more segments of the active optical path are lost,
the system can detect the loss of optical signals on the link. The system shuts down the
upstream optical amplifier instantly, to avoid any damage to maintenance engineers.
When the optical signals are restored to normal, the optical amplifier works normally again.
The loss of optical signals might be caused by
z Fiber cut
z Equipment deterioration
z Connector disconnection

Automatic Level Control


In a DWDM system, aged optical fibers, aged optical connectors or manual factors might lead
to the abnormal attenuation of transmission lines. In case the attenuation on a line segment
increases, all input and output power will be reduced on all downstream amplifiers. The
system OSNR will get worse. At the same time, the received optical power will also be
reduced. Receiving performance will be greatly affected. The closer the attenuated segment is
to the transmission end, the more influence on OSNR there will be.
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides the automatic level control (ALC).
If the ALC function is activated, this effect can be minimized. As the attenuation on a line
segment is increased, the input power on the amplifier will be reduced. However, due to ALC,
the output power as well as the input and output powers of other downstream amplifiers will
not be changed. Hence there will be much less influence on OSNR. The optical power
received by the receiver will not be changed. This improves the maintainability of signal
quality and of the transmission equipment.

Automatic Power Equilibrium


When the transmission distance reaches a certain length, the powers of channels in the
DWDM differ sharply, which affect the receiving performance of the system. The OptiX OSN
6800 provides the automatic power equilibrium (APE). The APE function can automatically
adjust optical power of each channel at the transmit end, so as to optimize the OSNR at the
receive end.

3.2.10 Main/Slave Subrack


The OptiX OSN 6800 supports main/slave subrack management. When multiple subracks are
used to form an NE, the main/slave subrack mode is required to realize the unified
management. In the main/slave subrack mode, the multiple subracks are displayed as an NE
on the T2000.
The OptiX OSN 6800 supports a maximum of seven slave subrack under one main subrack.
Normally, the subrack where the optical layer board or the overhead board is located serves as
the main subrack.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-9


OptiX OSN 6800
3 Product Features Product Description

NOTE
z The slave subrack cannot be upgraded to a main subrack.
z The HUB mode cannot be upgraded to the main/slave mode smoothly.

3.3 Upgrade and Maintenance


The OptiX OSN 6800 provides software package loading function, hot patch function and
pluggable optical modules.

3.3.1 Software Package Loading


The OptiX OSN 6800 supports the software package loading function.
In the software package loading mode, all new features of the NE are packed into a package.
One loading upgrades the software on the NE and the NE runs the software in the new
software package. Software package is an abstract concept. It does not mean that all software
sets are physically packed into a file. It means that all new software sets required on the NE
are gathered and then form a software package logically by using the software package
description file.

3.3.2 Hot Patch


With the hot patch function, the OptiX OSN 6800 supports the in-service upgrade of
equipment software without interrupting services.

3.3.3 Pluggable Optical Module


The OptiX OSN 6800 supports two kinds of pluggable optical modules: the enhanced small
form-factor pluggable (eSFP) and the 10 Gbit/s small form-factor pluggable (XFP).

3-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Contents

4 Hardware Architecture..............................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Cabinet ..........................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Structure...............................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Configuration of the Integrated Cabinet...............................................................................................4-3
4.2 Subrack..........................................................................................................................................................4-3
4.2.1 Structure...............................................................................................................................................4-3
4.2.2 Slot Distribution...................................................................................................................................4-5
4.3 Functional units.............................................................................................................................................4-5
4.3.1 Optical Transponder Unit.....................................................................................................................4-6
4.3.2 Tributary Unit.......................................................................................................................................4-8
4.3.3 Line Unit ..............................................................................................................................................4-9
4.3.4 Cross-connect Unit...............................................................................................................................4-9
4.3.5 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit .....................................................................................4-10
4.3.6 Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer Unit ...................................................................................................4-11
4.3.7 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing unit ........................................................................4-12
4.3.8 Optical Amplifier Unit .......................................................................................................................4-12
4.3.9 System Control and Communication Unit .........................................................................................4-13
4.3.10 OSC Unit..........................................................................................................................................4-14
4.3.11 Optical Protection Unit ....................................................................................................................4-14
4.3.12 Spectrum Analyzer Unit...................................................................................................................4-15
4.3.13 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit......................................................................................................4-16

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Figures

Figure 4-1 Appearance of an ETSI 300 mm middle-column cabinet .................................................................4-2


Figure 4-2 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram ....................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-3 Slots of the subrack...........................................................................................................................4-5

Figure 4-4 Position of the OTUs in the OptiX OSN 6800..................................................................................4-7


Figure 4-5 Position of the multiplexer and demultiplexer unit.........................................................................4-10
Figure 4-6 Position of the optical add/drop multiplexer unit............................................................................4-11

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Tables

Table 4-1 Full configuration of cabinets of different heights..............................................................................4-3


Table 4-2 Functional units ..................................................................................................................................4-5
Table 4-3 Functions of OTUs .............................................................................................................................4-7

Table 4-4 Functions of the tributary units...........................................................................................................4-9


Table 4-5 Functions of the line unit ....................................................................................................................4-9
Table 4-6 Functions of the cross-connect unit ....................................................................................................4-9

Table 4-7 Functions of the multiplexer and demultiplexer unit........................................................................4-10


Table 4-8 Functions of the optical add/drop multiplexer unit...........................................................................4-11
Table 4-9 Functions of the reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit ..........................................4-12

Table 4-10 Functions of the optical amplifier unit............................................................................................4-13


Table 4-11 Functions of the system control and communication unit...............................................................4-13
Table 4-12 Functions of the OSC unit ..............................................................................................................4-14

Table 4-13 Functions of the optical protection unit ..........................................................................................4-15


Table 4-14 Functions of the spectrum analyzer units .......................................................................................4-15
Table 4-15 Functions of the variable optical attenuator units ...........................................................................4-16

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary v


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 4 Hardware Architecture

4 Hardware Architecture

About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

Section Describes

4.1 Cabinet Structure and the configuration of the cabinet of the OptiX OSN
6800.
4.2 Subrack Structure and the slot distribution of the subrack of the OptiX OSN
6800.
4.3 Functional units Functional units of the OptiX OSN 6800.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-1


OptiX OSN 6800
4 Hardware Architecture Product Description

4.1 Cabinet
The OptiX OSN 6800 has hardware such as cabinet, subrack, DCM frame, fiber-spooling
frame and boards.
The OptiX OSN 6800 takes subracks as the basic working units. The subrack of the OptiX
OSN 6800 has independent power supply and can be installed in ETSI 300 mm
middle-column cabinet, standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet, or a 23-inch open rack.
In typical configuration, the OptiX OSN 6800 is installed in ETSI 300 mm middle-column
cabinet.

4.1.1 Structure
The main frame of the ETSI 300 mm middle-column cabinet is a rack with a door fixed at the
front, a column in the middle of each side, a rear door with air vents fixed at the back and
movable side doors on both sides. Figure 4-1 shows the appearance of an OptiX OSN 6800
ETSI 300 mm middle-column cabinet.

Figure 4-1 Appearance of an ETSI 300 mm middle-column cabinet

W
D

4-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 4 Hardware Architecture

4.1.2 Configuration of the Integrated Cabinet


The ETSI cabinets can be of two heights respectively. Cabinets of different types can be
configured with different quantity of OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.
A 23-inch open rack (7 feet high) can hold four OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.
Table 4-1 lists the full configuration of cabinets of different heights. When a cabinet is not
fully configured, configure the subracks from bottom to top.

Table 4-1 Full configuration of cabinets of different heights

Item 2.2 m Cabinet 2.6 m Cabinet

Quantity of configurable subracks in a 4 4


ETSI 300 mm middle-column cabinet
Quantity of configurable subracks in a 3 4
standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet

4.2 Subrack
The OptiX OSN 6800 takes subracks as the basic working units. The subrack of the OptiX
OSN 6800 has independent power supply.

4.2.1 Structure
Figure 4-2 shows the structure of the subrack.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-3


OptiX OSN 6800
4 Hardware Architecture Product Description

Figure 4-2 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram

1
9

8 3

7 5
6

1. Indicator 2. Power interface unit (PIU) 3. Board area


4. Fiber cabling area 5. Fan tray assembly 6. Air filter
7 Fiber spool 8 Mounting ear 9 Interface area

z Indicators: They indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack.
z Power interface unit: It provides one DB3 interfaces for one –48 V DC or –60 V DC
working power supply. Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack has two PIU boards to provide
two mutually protected power supplies.
z Board area: All service boards are in this area. Totally 21 slots are available.
z Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of the boards are
routed to the area before reaching the matched side of the cabinet. The mechanical VOA
is also installed in this area.
z Fan tray assembly: This area contains 10 fans for ventilation and heat dissipation of the
subrack.
z Air filter: It protects the subrack from outside dust in the air. It needs to be taken out and
cleaned periodically.
z Fiber spool: The fiber spool serves to coil the extra fibers. Fixed fiber spools are on two
sides of the subrack. The fibers whose extras are coiled in the fiber spool on the cabinet
side enter another subrack.
z Mounting ears: They fix the subrack in the cabinet.
z Interface area: This area is behind the subrack indicator panel, providing functional
interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm
output and cascading interface, and alarm input and output interface.

4-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 4 Hardware Architecture

4.2.2 Slot Distribution


The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, defined as IU1 to IU21 from left to right, as shown
in Figure 4-3.
z IU1–IU17 are for service boards.
z IU21 is for the AUX.
z IU19 and IU20 are for the PIU.
z IU18 is for the SCC.
z IU17 is available for the standby SCC or for the other service boards.
z IU9 is available for the active XCS or for the other service boards.
z IU10 is available for the standby XCS or for the other service boards.

Figure 4-3 Slots of the subrack

P
I
X X S S U
C C C C
I I I I I I P
I I I I I I I I S S C C
U U U U U U I
U U U U U U U U / / / /
1 1 1 1 1 1 U
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I I I I
1 2 3 4 5 6
U U U U
A
9 1 1 1
0 7 8 U
X

4.3 Functional units


The boards can be divided into thirteen functional units, as shown in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 Functional units


Functional Units Boards

Optical transponder unit L4G, LDGD, LDGS, LQMD, LQMS, LSX,


LSXR, LWX2, LWXD, LWXS
Tributary unit TDG, TQM, TQS
Line unit NS2
Cross-connect unit XCS
Optical multiplexer/demultiplexer unit D40, D40V, FIU, M40, M40V,

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-5


OptiX OSN 6800
4 Hardware Architecture Product Description

Functional Units Boards

Optical add/drop multiplexer unit CMR2, CMR4, MR2, MR4, MR8,


Reconfigurable optical add and drop RMU9, ROAM, WSD9, WSM9
multiplexing unit
Optical amplifier unit CRPC, OAU1, OBU1
System control and communication unit AUX, SCC
Optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit SC1, SC2
Optical protection unit DCP, OLP, SCS
Spectrum analyzer unit MCA4, MCA8
Variable optical attenuator unit VA1, VA4

4.3.1 Optical Transponder Unit


The optical transponder unit (OTU) accesses one or multiple channels.
It converges or converts the signals to output
z Standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1, or
z Standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2
In this way, it helps the multiplexer unit to perform wavelength division multiplexing on
signals of different wavelengths.
All OTUs of the OptiX OSN 6800 are transceivers and can perform the above process as well
as its reverse process at the same time.
OTUs include:
z L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity
z LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving
z LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
z LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s–2.5 Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual
fed and selective receiving
z LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s–2.5 Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single
fed and single receiving
z LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
z LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
z LWX2: arbitrary rate(16 Mbit/s–2.5 Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board
z LWXD: arbitrary rate(16 Mbit/s–2.5 Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board(single
transmit)
z LWXS: arbitrary rate(16 Mbit/s–2.5 Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board(double
transmit)
Figure 4-4shows the position of the OTUs in the system.

4-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 4 Hardware Architecture

Figure 4-4 Position of the OTUs in the OptiX OSN 6800

OTU

OTU
OM OA

Client-side equipment

Line-side ODF
OTU

SC1 FIU

OTU
OTU
OD OA

OTU

: OTU

Table 4-3 shows the functions of OTUs.

Table 4-3 Functions of OTUs

Board Function The Type/Rate Type of Regenerat WDM


Maximum of Signals Signals on or Board Specificati
Number of on Client WDM Side on
Client Side
Signals

L4G Convergence 6 GE OTU 5G - DWDM


and wavelength FEC 5G
conversion and
cross-connectio
n function
LDGD/LD Convergence 2 GE OTU1/STM-16 - DWDM
GS and wavelength CWDM
conversion and
cross-connectio
n function

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-7


OptiX OSN 6800
4 Hardware Architecture Product Description

Board Function The Type/Rate Type of Regenerat WDM


Maximum of Signals Signals on or Board Specificati
Number of on Client WDM Side on
Client Side
Signals

LQMD/LQ Convergence 4 GE, FE, OTU1 - DWDM


MS and wavelength FICON, CWDM
conversion FICON
Express,
FC50,
FC100,
FC200,
ESCON,
DVB-ASI,
STM1/OC3,
STM4/OC1
2,
STM16/OC
48
LSX Wavelength 1 STM-64, OTU2 LSXR DWDM
conversion OC-192,
10GE LAN,
10GE
WAN,
OTU2
LWX2 Wavelength 2 16 Mbit/s to The same as the - DWDM
conversion 2.5 Gbit/s optical signals CWDM
accessed
through the
client side
LWXD/LW Wavelength 1 16 Mbit/s to The same as the - DWDM
XS conversion 2.5 Gbit/s optical signals CWDM
accessed
through the
client side

4.3.2 Tributary Unit


The tributary units include:
z TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing unit
z TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing unit
z TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC48/OTU1 tributary service processing unit
Table 4-4 shows the functions of the tributary units.

4-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 4 Hardware Architecture

Table 4-4 Functions of the tributary units


Board Function

TDG Converts two GE optical signals into two GE electrical signals or multiplexes
two GE optical signals into one ODU1 electrical signals, and then sends the
signals to the backplane for further cross-connection.
The reverse process is similar.
TQM Converts four optical signals (100 Mbit/s–2.5 Gbit/s) into four electrical signals
or multiplexes them into one ODU1 electrical signal, and then sends the signals
to the backplane for further cross-connection.
The reverse process is similar.
TQS Converts four STM-16/OC48/OTU1 optical signals into ODU1 signals and
sends the signals to the backplane for further cross-connection.
The reverse process is similar.

4.3.3 Line Unit


The line unit includes:
NS2: 4 x ODU1 multiplexing OTU2 optical interface unit
Table 4-5 shows the functions of the line unit.

Table 4-5 Functions of the line unit

Board Function

NS2 Maps four ODU1 signals sent from the cross-connect board or the board in the
paired slot into an OTU2 signal and converts the signal into a standard DWDM
signal compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.

4.3.4 Cross-connect Unit


The cross-connect unit includes:
XCS: cross-connect and clock unit
Table 4-6 shows the functions of the cross-connect unit.

Table 4-6 Functions of the cross-connect unit

Board Function

XCS Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or GE services.


Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 320 Gbit/s for
ODU1 signals.
Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 160 Gbit/s for
GE services.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-9


OptiX OSN 6800
4 Hardware Architecture Product Description

4.3.5 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit


The multiplexer and demultiplexer unit multiplexes or demultiplexes optical signals of
different wavelengths.
The multiplexer and demultiplexer units include:
z D40: 40-channel demultiplexing unit
z D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA
z FIU: fiber interface unit
z M40: 40-channel multiplexing unit
z M40V: 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA
Figure 4-5 shows the position of the multiplexer and demultiplexer unit in the system.

Figure 4-5 Position of the multiplexer and demultiplexer unit

OTU

OTU
OM OA
Client-side equipment

Line-side ODF
OTU

SC1 FIU

OTU
OTU
OD OA

OTU

: The multiplexer and demultiplexer unit

Table 4-7 shows the functions of the multiplexer and demultiplexer unit.

Table 4-7 Functions of the multiplexer and demultiplexer unit


Board Function

D40 Demultiplexes main path signal to a maximum of 40 channels of service.


D40V Demultiplexes one signal into a maximum of 40 signals and adjusts the output
optical power of each channel.
FIU Realizes the multiplexing and demultiplexing of signals transmitted by the
main path and the optical supervisory channel.
M40 Multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels into one fiber.
M40V Multiplexes a maximum of 40 signals into one fiber and adjusts the input
optical power of each channel.

4-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 4 Hardware Architecture

4.3.6 Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer Unit


In the optical add/drop multiplexer unit, single-wavelength optical signals are added/dropped
from the multiplexed signals and sent to an OTU.
At the same time, the single-wavelength optical signals transmitted at the OTU are
multiplexed into the multiplexed signals.
The optical add/drop multiplexer units include:
z CMR4: CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
z CMR2: CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
z MR4: 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
z MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
z MR8: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
Figure 4-6 shows the position of the optical add/drop multiplexer unit in the system.

Figure 4-6 Position of the optical add/drop multiplexer unit

SC2

East line-
sideODF
West line-
sideODF

FIU OA OA FIU
OADM OADM
Unit Unit
OA OA

O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

West client-side East client-side

: The optical add/drop multiplexer unit

Table 4-8 shows the functions of the optical add/drop multiplexer unit.

Table 4-8 Functions of the optical add/drop multiplexer unit

Board Function WDM


technical
specification

CMR2 Adds/drops and multiplexes two signals to/from the CWDM


multiplexed signals.
CMR4 Adds/drops and multiplexes four signals to/from the CWDM
multiplexed signals.
MR2 Adds/drops and multiplexes two signals to/from the DWDM
multiplexed signals.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-11


OptiX OSN 6800
4 Hardware Architecture Product Description

Board Function WDM


technical
specification

MR4 Adds/drops and multiplexes four signals to/from the DWDM


multiplexed signals.
MR8 Adds/drops and multiplexes eight signals to/from the DWDM
multiplexed signals.

4.3.7 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing unit


The reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit demultiplexes any
single-wavelength signal from multiplexed signals and sends it to the OTU. It also
multiplexes any single-wavelength signal into multiplexed signals.
The reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing units include:
z RMU9: ROADM multiplexing unit
z ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding unit
z WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing unit
z WSM9:9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing unit
Table 4-9 shows the functions of the reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit.

Table 4-9 Functions of the reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit
Board Function

RMU9 Adds eight single-channel signal or multi-channel signals to the main path.
Used with the OTU with tunable wavelength, the RMU9 realizes the dynamic
input of eight channel signals.
ROAM Realizes the dynamic adding/dropping, pass-through, and blocking of a
maximum of 40 wavelengths as well as the dynamic grooming of wavelengths
for the services on the ring network.
WSD9 Configured any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain
network can transmit any wavelength combination to any interface so as to
achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths.
WSM9 Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain
network can receive any wavelengths at the local station through any interfaces
as to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths.

4.3.8 Optical Amplifier Unit


The optical amplifier unit amplifies the power of the multiplexed optical signals to extend the
transmission distance.
The optical amplifier units include:

4-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 4 Hardware Architecture

z CRPC: case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band


z OAU1: optical amplifying unit
z OBU1: optical booster unit
Figure 4-5 shows the position of the optical amplifier unit in the system.
Table 4-10 shows the functions of the optical amplifier unit.

Table 4-10 Functions of the optical amplifier unit


Board Function Typical Gains

CRPC Generates multi-channel pump light of high 10 dB (G.652 fiber)


power, providing energy for the amplification of
signals in the fiber.
Realizes the distributed in-service amplification 12 dB (LEAF fiber)
of signals over long distance with wide
bandwidth and low noise.
OAU1a Amplifies at most 40 channels (the channel 20 dB to 31 dB
spacing being 100 GHz) at the same time.
OBU1 Amplifies at most 40 channels (the channel 20 dB, 23 dB
spacing being 100 GHz) at the same time.

a: The OAU1 continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB based on the input optical power.

4.3.9 System Control and Communication Unit


The system control and communication unit is the control center for the equipment.
It helps the NM system to manage the boards of the equipment and enables the equipment to
communicate with each other.
The system control and communication units include:
z AUX: system auxiliary interface unit
z SCC: system control and communication unit
Table 4-11 shows the functions of the system control and communication unit.

Table 4-11 Functions of the system control and communication unit


Board Function

AUX Provides the system with various auxiliary interfaces and management
interfaces.
SCC Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm
output of a subrack.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-13


OptiX OSN 6800
4 Hardware Architecture Product Description

NOTE
An NE node of the OptiX OSN 6800 can consist of more than one subrack. Usually, each subrack has
two SCC boards in IU17 and IU18 for mutual backup. When subracks are cascaded as primary subrack
and secondary subrack, the SCC in the secondary subrack collects intra-subrack alarms and overhead as
well as distributes service configuration. Other than processing the intra-board overhead and alarms, the
SCC in the primary subrack also performs the overhead processing, alarm processing, and packet
loading of all secondary subracks. Then it issues configuration to the secondary subrack and connects to
the NM system.

4.3.10 OSC Unit


OSC unit transmits and extracts the system overhead information and sends then to the SCC
after simple processing.
The OSC units include:
z SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
z SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit
Figure 4-5 shows the position of the OSC unit in the system.
Table 4-12 shows the functions of the OSC unit.

Table 4-12 Functions of the OSC unit


Board Function Used for

SC1 The SC1 is used to receive, process, and transmit one optical OTM
supervisory signal.
SC2 The SC2 is used to receive, process, and transmit one optical FOADM
supervisory signal. ROADM
OLA

4.3.11 Optical Protection Unit


The optical protection unit protects the networks with an OptiX OSN 6800 system in
self-healing mode.
The optical protection units include:
z OLP: optical line protection unit
z DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit
z SCS: sync optical channel separator unit
Table 4-13 shows the functions of the optical protection unit.

4-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 4 Hardware Architecture

Table 4-13 Functions of the optical protection unit


Board Function

OLP Provides the optical line protection to ensure normal receiving of signals, when the active fiber
decreases in performance, it automatically switches to the standby fiber.
Provides the intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU that has no dual fed and
selective receiving function.
Provides the client-side 1+1 protection, making use of a working OTU and a protection OTU to
protect the client-side services.
DCP Provides the intra- board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU that has no dual fed
and selective receiving function. Compared with the OLP, the
DCP provides protection for two signals so as to realize high-integrated 1+1 protection.
Provides the client-side 1+1 protection, making use of a working OTU and a protection OTU to
protect the client-side services.
SCS Receives signals from the working and the protection OTUs and realizes the client-side 1+1
protection.

4.3.12 Spectrum Analyzer Unit


The spectrum analyzer units include:
z MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit
z MCA8: 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit
Table 4-14 shows the functions of the spectrum analyzer units.

Table 4-14 Functions of the spectrum analyzer units

Board Function

MCA4 Monitors in service the


z Central wavelength
z Power value
z Signal-to-noise ratio
z The number of optical wavelengths of the optical signal
The information monitored is reported to the SCC for processing.
Provides the spectral analysis for four channels.
MCA8 Monitors in service the
z Central wavelength
z Power value
z Signal-to-noise ratio
z The number of optical wavelengths of the optical signal
The information monitored is reported to the SCC for processing.
Provides the spectral analysis for eight channels.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-15


OptiX OSN 6800
4 Hardware Architecture Product Description

4.3.13 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit


The variable optical attenuator units include:
z VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit
z VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit
Table 4-15 shows the functions of the auxiliary unit.

Table 4-15 Functions of the variable optical attenuator units


Board Function

VA1 Adjusts the optical power of one optical channel according to the control
command sent by the SCC.
VA4 Adjusts the optical power of four optical channels according to the control
command sent by the SCC.

4-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Contents

5 Software Architecture................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Communication Protocols and Interfaces......................................................................................................5-3
5.3 Board Software..............................................................................................................................................5-3
5.4 NE Software ..................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.5 Network Management System ......................................................................................................................5-4

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Figures

Figure 5-1 Software architecture of the OptiX OSN 6800 .................................................................................5-2

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 5 Software Architecture

5 Software Architecture

About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

Section Describes

5.1 Overview The whole software of the OptiX OSN 6800.


5.2 Communication Protocols Communication protocols used in the OptiX OSN 6800.
5.3 Board Software Functions and implementation of the board software.
5.4 NE Software Functions and implementation of the NE software.
5.5 Network Management Functions and implementation of the network
System management (NM) system.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-1


OptiX OSN 6800
5 Software Architecture Product Description

5.1 Overview
The entire software of the OptiX OSN 6800 is distributed in three modules including board
software, NE software and NM system. The software resides respectively on functional
boards, the SCC, and NM computer.
Hierarchical structure ensures that it is highly reliable and efficient. Each layer performs
specific functions and provides service for the upper layer.
The system software architecture is shown in Figure 5-1.
In the diagram, all modules are NE software except "Network Management System" and
"Board Software".

Figure 5-1 Software architecture of the OptiX OSN 6800

Network Management
System

High Level
Communication Module

Real-time
multi-task Equipment Management Database
operating Module management
system module

Communication Module

NE Software

Board Software

5-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 5 Software Architecture

5.2 Communication Protocols and Interfaces


The OptiX OSN 6800 adopts the Qx interface.
Complete protocol stack and messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811
and Q.812.
Qx interface is mainly used to connect mediation device (MD), Q adaptation (QA) and NE
(NE) equipment through local communication network (LCN).
At present, QA is provided by NE management layer. MD and operating system (OS) are
provided by NM layer. They are connected to each other through Qx interface.
According to the Recommendations, Qx interface provided by the system is developed on the
basis of TCP/IP connectionless network layer service (CLNS1) protocol stack.
In addition, to support remote access of the NM through Modem, IP layer uses serial line
internet protocol (SLIP).

5.3 Board Software


The board software runs on each board. It manages, monitors and controls the operation of the
board.
It receives the command issued from the NE software and reports the board status to the NE
software through performance events and alarm.
The specific functions include:
z Alarm management
z Performance management
z Configuration management
z Communication management
It directly controls the functional circuits in corresponding boards and implements ITU-T
compliant specific functions of the NE.

5.4 NE Software
NE software manages, monitors and controls the board operations in NE.
It also assists NMS to facilitate the centralized management over WDM network.
According to ITU-T M.3010, NE software is at unit management layer in telecom
management network, performing NE function (NEF), partial mediation function (MF) and
OS function at network unit layer.
Data communication function (DCF) provides communication channel between NE and other
equipment (including NM and other NEs).
z Real-time multi-task operating system

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-3


OptiX OSN 6800
5 Software Architecture Product Description

The OptiX OSN 6800 NE software offers real-time multi-task operating system to
manage public resources and support application programs.
It isolates the application programs from the processor and provides an application
program execution environment, which is independent of the processor hardware.
z Communication module
The communication module is the interface module between NE software and board
software.
According to related protocol, communication function between the NE software and the
board software is for information exchange and maintenance of the equipment.
Through the communication, board maintenance and operation commands from the NE
software are sent to the boards. On the other hand, the state, alarm and performance
events of the board are reported to the NE software.
z Equipment management module
The equipment management module is the core of the NE software for the NE
management.
It includes administrator and agent.
Administrator can send NM operation commands and receive events.
Agent can respond to the NM operation commands sent by the administrator, implement
the operations of the managed object, and send up events according to the change of
status of the managed object.
z High-level communication module
The high-level communication module exchanges management information among NEs
and between the NM system and the NE.
It consists of network communication module, serial communication module and ECC
communication module.
z Database management module
The database management module is a part of the NE software.
It includes two independent parts: data and program.
The data are organized in the form of database, including network database, alarm
database, performance database and equipment database.
The program manages and accesses the data in the database.

5.5 Network Management System


The NM system implements a unified management over the optical transmission network, and
maintains all ION, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipment in the network.
In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, it is an NM system that integrates standard
management information model as well as object-oriented management technology.
It exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module to monitor
and manage the network equipment.
The NM software runs on a workstation or PC, managing the equipment and the transmission
network to help to operate, maintain and manage the transmission equipment.
The management functions of the NM software include:

5-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 5 Software Architecture

z Alarm management: collects, prompts, filters, browses, acknowledges, checks, clears,


and counts in real time; fulfills alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis and fault
diagnosis.
z Performance management: sets performance monitoring; browses, analyzes and prints
performance data; forecasts medium-term and long-term performance; and resets
performance register.
z Configuration management: configures and manages interfaces, clocks, services, trails,
subnets and time.
z Security management: provides NM user management, NE user management, NE login
management, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout and local craft terminal (LCT) access
control of the equipment.
z Maintenance management: provides loopback, board resetting, automatic laser shutdown
(ALS) and optical fiber power detection, and collects equipment data to help the
maintenance personnel in troubleshooting.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-5


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Contents

6 DWDM System Configuration................................................................................................6-1


6.1 OTM..............................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................6-2
6.1.2 Functional Units...................................................................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 Signal Flow ..........................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 FOADM ........................................................................................................................................................6-3
6.2.1 OADM Equipment with Optical Multiplexer Unit and Optical Demultiplexer Unit ...........................6-3
6.2.2 OADM Equipment with OADM Units ................................................................................................6-4
6.3 ROADM........................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.1 ROADM Equipment with WSD9 Board and WSM9 Board................................................................6-6
6.3.2 ROADM Equipment with ROAM Boards ...........................................................................................6-7
6.3.3 ROADM Equipment with WSD9 Board and RMU9 Board ................................................................6-9
6.4 OLA ............................................................................................................................................................6-11
6.4.1 Functions............................................................................................................................................6-11
6.4.2 Functional Units.................................................................................................................................6-11
6.4.3 Signal Flow ........................................................................................................................................6-11

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Figures

Figure 6-1 Schematic diagram of DWDM OTM equipment with the optical multiplexer unit and the optical
demultiplexer unit ...............................................................................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-2 Schematic diagram of DWDM OADM equipment with the optical multiplex unit and the optical
demultiplex unit ..................................................................................................................................................6-4
Figure 6-3 Schematic diagram of DWDM OADM equipment with OADM boards..........................................6-5

Figure 6-4 Schematic diagram of ROADM equipment with the WSM9 board and WSD9 board .....................6-7
Figure 6-5 Schematic diagram of ROADM equipment with the ROAM boards ...............................................6-9
Figure 6-6 Schematic diagram of ROADM equipment with the RMU9 board and WSD9 board ...................6-10

Figure 6-7 Schematic diagram of DWDM OLA equipment.............................................................................6-11

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 6 DWDM System Configuration

6 DWDM System Configuration

About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

Section Describes

6.1 OTM Functions, functional units and signal flow of OTM in a DWDM system.
6.2 FOADM Functions, functional units and signal flow of FOADM in a DWDM
system.
6.3 ROADM Functions, functional units and signal flow of ROADM in a DWDM
system.
6.4 OLA Functions, functional units and signal flow of OLA in a DWDM system.

As a modular system, the OptiX OSN 6800 consists of boards with different functions.
Combination of various boards leads to different equipment types.
The OptiX OSN 6800 (DWDM) can be configured as four equipment types:
z Optical terminal multiplexer (OTM)
z Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM)
z Reconfigurable optical add or drop multiplexer(ROADM)
z Optical line amplifier (OLA)

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-1


OptiX OSN 6800
6 DWDM System Configuration Product Description

6.1 OTM
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides OTM equipment formed by optical multiplexers and
demultiplexers.

6.1.1 Functions
The DWDM OTM equipment is used at the terminal station, and logically divided into
z Transmit direction
z Receive direction
In the transmit direction, the OTM amplifies client-side signals after converging/converting
them. Then the signals are multiplexed with the supervisory channel signals before line
transmission. In the receive direction, the OTM performs the converse.
This OTM equipment type applies to stations whose initial wavelengths are more than 16. It
supports expansion of up to 40 wavelengths without interrupting services.

6.1.2 Functional Units


An OTM consists of:
z Optical transponder unit (OTU)
z Optical amplifier unit (OA)
z Optical multiplex unit (OM)
z Optical demultiplex unit (OD)
z Unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit (SC1)
z Fiber interface unit (FIU)
z System control and communication unit (SCC)
For the boards used in each unit, refer to Chapter 4 "Hardware Architecture".

6.1.3 Signal Flow


In the transmit direction, through the OTU, the OTM equipment converges/transforms the
accessed signals into signals with ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelengths. After that,
the signals are multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit into the main optical path. Then,
these main path optical signals are amplified and multiplexed with the optical supervisory
signal. Finally, the multiplexed signals are sent to the line for transmission.
In the receive direction, the optical supervisory signal and the main path optical signals are
separated. Then, the former is sent to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit for
processing, and the latter is demultiplexed by the optical demultiplexer unit into signals of
different wavelengths, and finally sent to the corresponding client-side equipment after being
transformed/divided by the OTUs.
The schematic diagram of this OTM equipment type is shown in Figure 6-1.

6-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 6 DWDM System Configuration

Figure 6-1 Schematic diagram of DWDM OTM equipment with the optical multiplexer unit and
the optical demultiplexer unit

OTU

OTU
OM OA
Client-sideequipment

Line-side
OTU

SC 1 FIU

OD F
OTU
OTU
OD OA

OTU

OTU: optical transponder unit OM: optical multiplex unit


SC1: unidirectional OSC unit OD: optical demultiplex unit
FIU: fiber interface unit OA: optical amplifier unit

6.2 FOADM
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides two types of FOADM equipment:
z FOADM equipment formed by optical multiplexers and optical demultiplexers
z FOADM equipment formed by OADMs

6.2.1 FOADM Equipment with Optical Multiplexer Unit and


Optical Demultiplexer Unit
Functions
FOADM adds/drops fixed wavelengths to/from the multiplexed signals. This OADM
equipment type is usually applied to central sites. It consists of two back-to-back OTMs.

Functional Units
An OADM consists of:
z Optical transponder unit (OTU)
z Optical amplifier unit (OA)
z Optical multiplex unit (OM)
z Optical demultiplex unit (OD)
z Bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit (SC2)
z Fiber interface unit (FIU)
z System control and communication unit (SCC)
For the boards used in each unit, refer to Chapter 4 "Hardware Architecture".

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-3


OptiX OSN 6800
6 DWDM System Configuration Product Description

Signal Flow
The DWDM OADM equipment is responsible for processing the optical signals in two
transmission directions.
It separates the optical supervisory signal from the main path optical signals and sends the
former to the OSC unit for processing.
Main path signals are sent into the OADM demultiplexer after amplification. Some
wavelengths are dropped and enter the OTU before being sent to the local client device. The
other wavelengths are not demultiplexed locally. They pass through and are multiplexed with
the locally added wavelengths by the multiplexer before the optical amplification. Finally, the
signals are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory signals for line transmission.
Then the multiplexed wavelengths are amplified and further multiplexed with the OSC signal
for transmission in line.
When the optical transmission distance is long, it may prevent the line extension by one or
more than one affecting factors of system transmission performance, such as dispersion,
power, optical noise, non-linear effect, or polarization mode dispersion. In this case,
regeneration OTU can be configured to perform the 3R (reshaping, retiming, and regeneration)
of electrical signals.
The schematic diagram of this OADM equipment type is shown in Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2 Schematic diagram of DWDM OADM equipment with the optical multiplex unit and
the optical demultiplex unit

SC2

OA OD

East line-
OM OA

sideODF
West line-
sideODF

OTU OTU
FIU FIU
OTU OTU

OA OM OD OA
OTU OTU
OTU OTU

OTU: optical transponder unit OM: optical multiplex unit


SC2: bi-directional OSC unit OD: optical demultiplex unit
FIU: fiber interface unit OA: optical amplifier unit

6.2.2 FOADM Equipment with OADM Units


Functions
FOADM adds/drops fixed wavelengths to/from the multiplexed signals. This OADM
equipment type is usually applied to edge sites. It features:
z Small insertion loss
z Flexible expandability
z Low initial investment
6-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)
OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 6 DWDM System Configuration

Functional Units
An OTM consists of:
z Optical transponder unit (OTU)
z Optical amplifier unit (OA)
z Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
z Bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit (SC2)
z Fiber interface unit (FIU)
z System control and communication unit (SCC)
For the boards used in each unit, refer to Chapter 4 "Hardware Architecture".

Signal Flow
The DWDM OADM equipment is responsible for processing the optical signals in two
transmission directions.
It separates the optical supervisory signal from the main path optical signals and sends the
former to the OSC unit for processing.
The main path optical signals are amplified and sent to the OADM unit, where part of the
wavelengths are dropped to the OTUs and then to the client side equipment. The other
wavelengths directly pass through the OADM unit and are multiplexed with the wavelengths
that are added locally.
Then the multiplexed wavelengths are amplified and further multiplexed with the OSC for
transmission in line.
The schematic diagram of this OADM equipment type is shown in Figure 6-3.

Figure 6-3 Schematic diagram of DWDM OADM equipment with OADM boards

SC2

East line-
sideODF
West line-
sideODF

FIU OA OA FIU
OADM OADM
Unit Unit
OA OA

O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

West client-side East client-side

OTU: optical transponder unit FIU: fiber interface unit


SC2: bi-directional OSC unit OA: optical amplifier unit
OADM unit: OADM unit(s)

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-5


OptiX OSN 6800
6 DWDM System Configuration Product Description

6.3 ROADM
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides three types of ROADM equipment:
z ROADM equipment formed by WSD9 and WSM9
z ROADM equipment formed by ROAMs
z ROADM equipment formed by WSD9 and RMU9

6.3.1 ROADM Equipment with WSD9 Board and WSM9 Board


Functions
Reconfigurable optical add or drop multiplexer (ROADM) with WSS technology can add and
drop channels dynamically within a ring network. It also supports extension between ring
networks with a maximum of eight degrees.
The WSD9 realizes dynamic and configurable demultiplexing of any wavelength to any port.
The board can output any one of the wavelength groups at any equipment in ring networks
and chain networks. After that, it can distribute any output wavelength to a port to achieve
genuine dynamic wavelength distribution.
The WSM9 realizes dynamic and configurable multiplexing of any wavelength to any port.
The board can input any one of the wavelength groups at any equipment in ring networks and
chain networks. After that, it can distribute any output wavelength to a port to achieve genuine
dynamic wavelength distribution.
The ROADM formed by the WSD9 and the WSM9 can be adopted in center sites or edge
sites. Its merits lie in the following aspects:
z Flexible expansion without service interruption
z Low operation cost
z Adjustment of wavelength adding/dropping and passing through status by NM software
to realize remote dynamic adjustment of wavelength status

Functional Units
Consisting of OADM boards (optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards), WSD9, and
WSM9 board, an ROADM system can be divided into units as follows
z Optical transponder unit (OTU)
z Optical amplifier unit (OA)
z Bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit (SC2)
z Fiber interface unit (FIU)
z Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer or optical multiplexer and demultiplexer
z 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board (WSM9)
z 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board (WSD9)
z System control and communication unit (SCC)
For the boards used in each unit, refer to Chapter 4 "Hardware Architecture".

Signal Flow
ROADMs process optical signals in two transmission directions.

6-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 6 DWDM System Configuration

It separates optical supervisory signals and the main path signals from the received line
signals. The supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory units to be processed. The
main path signals are amplified and sent to the WSD9 board.
The wavelengths that need to be output locally are output from ports given in the
configuration. Output multiplexed signals are demultiplexed to single wavelengths by the
demultiplexer before entering the OTU and the local client device. Output single wavelengths
can be directly sent to local client device.
The other wavelengths are not added/dropped locally. They pass through and are multiplexed
with the wavelength input by the WSM9 before optical amplification. Then, they are
multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory signals for line transmission.
Figure 6-4 shows the functional modules of this type of ROADM.

Figure 6-4 Schematic diagram of ROADM equipment with the WSM9 board and WSD9 board

West client-side East client-side

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

OD OM

OA WSD9 WSM9 OA
West line-

East line-
sideODF

sideODF
FIU FIU
SC2

OA WSM9 WSD9 OA

OM OD

O O O OO O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

West client-side East client-side

FIU: fiber interface unit OA: optical amplifier unit SC2: bi-directional OSC unit
OD: optical demultiplexer OM: optical multiplexer OTU: optical transponder unit
WSD9: 9-port wavelength WSM9: 9-port wavelength
selective switching selective switching multiplexing
demultiplexing board board

6.3.2 ROADM Equipment with ROAM Boards


Functions
ROADM equipment formed by ROAM boards can add/drop all wavelengths at one time at
the prescribed optical port. ROAM boards realize functions such as dynamic adding/dropping,
passing through, blocking, signal path optical power equalization and optical power detection
for dynamic grooming of service wavelengths in the ring network.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-7


OptiX OSN 6800
6 DWDM System Configuration Product Description

The ROADM formed by the ROAM boards can be adopted in center sites or edge sits. Its
merits lie in the following aspects:
z Flexible expansion without service interruption
z Low operation cost
z Adjustment of wavelength adding/dropping and passing through status by NM software
to realize remote dynamic adjustment of wavelength status

Functional Units
Consisting of OADM boards (optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards) and ROAM
boards, an ROADM system can be divided into units as follows
z Optical transponder unit (OTU)
z Optical amplifier unit (OA)
z Bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit (SC2)
z Fiber interface unit (FIU)
z Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer or optical demultiplexer
z Reconfigurable optical add module board (ROAM)
z System control and communication unit (SCC)
For the boards used in each unit, refer to Chapter 4 "Hardware Architecture".

Signal Flow
ROADMs process optical signals in two transmission directions.
It separates optical supervisory signals and the main path signals from the received line
signals. The supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory units to be processed.
The main path signals are amplified and sent to the ROAM board. The signals to be output are
demultiplexed by the demultiplexer before entering the OTU and the local client device. The
other wavelengths are not added/dropped locally. Instead, they pass through and are
multiplexed with the wavelength added locally before optical amplification. Then, they are
multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory signals for line transmission.
Figure 6-5 shows the functional modules of this type of ROADM.

6-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 6 DWDM System Configuration

Figure 6-5 Schematic diagram of ROADM equipment with the ROAM boards

SC2

West line-
sideODF

East line-
sideODF
FIU FIU
OA OA
ROAM ROAM
OA OA

OD OD

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

West client-side East client-side

FIU: fiber interface unit OA: optical amplifier unit SC2: bi-directional OSC unit
OD: optical demultiplexer OTU: optical transponder unit ROAM: reconfigurable optical add
module board

6.3.3 ROADM Equipment with WSD9 Board and RMU9 Board


Functions
Reconfigurable optical add or drop multiplexer (ROADM) with WSD9 board and RMU9
board can add and drop channels dynamically within a ring network. It also supports
extension between ring networks with a maximum of eight degrees.
The WSD9 realizes dynamic and configurable demultiplexing of any wavelength to any port.
The board can output any one of the wavelength groups at any node in ring networks and
chain networks. After that, it can distribute any output wavelength to a port to achieve genuine
dynamic wavelength distribution.
The RMU9 adds wavelengths. Its adding port can cooperate with the wavelength-tunable
OTU to realize all dynamic input of eight wavelengths. Each adding port of the RMU9 can be
connected to the multiplexer. Client-side signals are multiplexed by the multiplexer and input
through the adding port of the RMU9.
The ROADM formed by the WSD9 and the RMU9 board can be adopted in center sites or
edge sits. Its merits lie in the following aspects:
z Flexible expansion without service interruption
z Low operation cost
z Adjustment of wavelength adding/dropping and passing through status by NM software
to realize remote dynamic adjustment of wavelength status

Functional Units
Consisting of OADM boards (optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards), WSD9, and
WSM9 boards, an ROADM system can be divided into units as follows
z Optical transponder unit (OTU)
z Optical amplifier unit (OA)
z Bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit (SC2)
Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-9
OptiX OSN 6800
6 DWDM System Configuration Product Description

z Fiber interface unit (FIU)


z OADM or optical multiplexer and demultiplexer
z 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board (WSD9)
z ROADM multiplexing board (RMU9)
z System control and communication unit (SCC)
For the boards used in each unit, refer to Chapter 4 "Hardware Architecture".

Signal Flow
ROADMs process optical signals in two transmission directions.
It separates optical supervisory signals from the main path signals in the received line signals.
The supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory units to be processed. The main
path signals are amplified and sent to the WSD9.
The wavelengths that need to be output locally are output from prescribed ports according to
the configuration. Output multiplexed signals are demultiplexed to single wavelengths by the
demultiplexer before entering the OTU and the local client device. Output single wavelengths
can be directly sent to local client device.
The other wavelengths are not added/dropped locally. They pass through and are multiplexed
with the wavelength input by the RMU9 before optical amplification. Then, they are
multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory signals for line transmission.
Figure 6-6 shows the functional modules of this type of ROADM.

Figure 6-6 Schematic diagram of ROADM equipment with the RMU9 board and WSD9 board
West client-side East client-side

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

OD OM

OA WSD9 RMU9 OA
West line-

East line-
sideODF

sideODF

FIU FIU
SC2

OA RMU9 WSD9 OA

OM OD

O O O OO O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

West client-side East client-side

FIU: fiber interface unit OA: optical amplifier unit SC2: bi-directional OSC unit
OD: optical demultiplexer OTU: optical transponder unit WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective
switching demultiplexing board
OM: optical multiplexer RMU9: ROADM
multiplexing board

6-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 6 DWDM System Configuration

6.4 OLA
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides OLA equipment.

6.4.1 Functions
The DWDM OLA equipment is used for amplification of the optical signals from two
transmission directions.

6.4.2 Functional Units


An OLA consists of:
z Optical amplifier unit (OA)
z Bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit (SC2)
z Fiber interface unit (FIU)
z System control and communication unit (SCC)
For the boards used in each unit, refer to Chapter 4 "Hardware Architecture".

6.4.3 Signal Flow


It separates the optical supervisory signal from the main path optical signals and sends the
former to the OSC unit for processing.
The main path optical signals are amplified by the amplifier unit and multiplexed with the
OSC that has already been processed, and then sent to the line fiber for transmission.
The schematic diagram of DWDM OLA equipment is illustrated in Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7 Schematic diagram of DWDM OLA equipment

OA

West
line-side East
ODF FIU SC2 FIU line-side
ODF

OA

FIU: fiber interface unit OA: optical amplifier unit


SC2: bi-directional OSC unit

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-11


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Contents

7 CWDM System Configuration ................................................................................................7-1


7.1 OTM..............................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.2 Functional Units...................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.3 Signal Flow ..........................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2 FOADM ........................................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 Functional Units...................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.3 Signal Flow ..........................................................................................................................................7-3

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Figures

Figure 7-1 Schematic diagram of CWDM OTM node .......................................................................................7-3


Figure 7-2 Schematic diagram of CWDM FOADM node .................................................................................7-4

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 7 CWDM System Configuration

7 CWDM System Configuration

About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

Section Describes

7.1 OTM Functions, functional units and signal flow of OTM in a CWDM system.
7.2 FOADM Functions, functional units and signal flow of FOADM in a CWDM
system.

Configuration of CWDM node is rather simple, because:


z The CWDM technology does not support optical amplifier.
z The OptiX OSN 6800 (CWDM) usually adopts ESC to reduce the cost.
The OptiX OSN 6800 (CWDM) can be configured as two node types:
z Optical terminal multiplexer (OTM)
z Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM)

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-1


OptiX OSN 6800
7 CWDM System Configuration Product Description

7.1 OTM
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides OTM equipment formed by OADM boards.

7.1.1 Functions
The OTM is adopted in terminal stations, logically divided into transmit direction and receive
direction. In the transmit direction, the OTM converges or converts the client-side signals.
Then the signals are multiplexed with the supervisory channel signals before line transmission.
In the receive direction, the OTM performs the converse.

7.1.2 Functional Units


An OptiX OSN 6800 CWDM OTM node has the following functional units:
z Optical transponder unit (OTU)
z Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
z System control and communication unit (SCC)
For the boards used in each unit, refer to Chapter 4 "Hardware Architecture".

7.1.3 Signal Flow


The CWDM OTM node is used at the terminal station, and logically divided into
z Transmit direction
z Receive direction
In the transmit direction, the accessed signals are converged/transformed by the OTU into
signals with ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM wavelengths. After that, the signals are
multiplexed by the OADM unit into the main optical path and sent to the line for
transmission.
In the receive direction, the line signals are demultiplexed by the OADM unit into signals of
different wavelengths, and then sent to the corresponding client-side equipment after being
transformed/divided by the OTUs.
The schematic diagram of CWDM OTM node is shown in Figure 7-1.

7-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 7 CWDM System Configuration

Figure 7-1 Schematic diagram of CWDM OTM node

OTU

Client-side equipment

Line-side ODF
OTU
OADM
Unit
OTU

OTU

OADM Unit: OADM unit(s) OTU: Optical transponder unit

7.2 FOADM
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides FOADM equipment formed by OADM boards.

7.2.1 Functions
FOADM adds/drops fixed wavelengths to/from the multiplexed signals.

7.2.2 Functional Units


An OptiX OSN 6800 CWDM FOADM node has the following functional units:
z Optical transponder unit (OTU)
z Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
z System control and communication unit (SCC)
For the boards used in each unit, refer to Chapter 4 "Hardware Architecture".

7.2.3 Signal Flow


The CWDM FOADM node is responsible for processing the optical signals from two
transmission directions.
It receives and sends line signals to the OADM unit, where some wavelengths are dropped to
the OTUs and then to the client side equipment.
Other wavelengths just pass through the OADM unit and are multiplexed with the
wavelengths added locally.
Then the multiplexed wavelengths are sent to the line for transmission.
The schematic diagram of CWDM FOADM node is shown in Figure 7-2.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-3


OptiX OSN 6800
7 CWDM System Configuration Product Description

Figure 7-2 Schematic diagram of CWDM FOADM node

Pass through
West East
line-side OADM Unit OADM Unit line-side
ODF ODF

O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

West client-side equipment East client-side equipment

OADM Unit: OADM unit(s) OTU: Optical transponder unit

7-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Contents

8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services ...............................................................................8-1


8.1 Dynamic Optical Layer Grooming................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.1 Intra-Ring Wavelength Grooming by ROAM Boards..........................................................................8-2
8.1.2 Intra-Ring Wavelength Grooming by WSD9 Boards and RMU9 Boards............................................8-6
8.1.3 Intra-Ring Wavelength Grooming by WSD9 Boards and WSM9 Boards .........................................8-10
8.1.4 Inter-Ring Wavelength Grooming by WSD9 Boards and RMU9 Boards..........................................8-14
8.2 Electrical Layer Grooming..........................................................................................................................8-20
8.2.1 Integrated Grooming ..........................................................................................................................8-21
8.2.2 Distributed Grooming ........................................................................................................................8-21
8.2.3 Application of Electrical Layer Grooming.........................................................................................8-22

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Figures

Figure 8-1 ROADM node by ROAM boards .....................................................................................................8-3


Figure 8-2 Intra-ring grooming ..........................................................................................................................8-3
Figure 8-3 Service grooming at node A..............................................................................................................8-4

Figure 8-4 Service grooming at node B..............................................................................................................8-5


Figure 8-5 Service grooming at node C..............................................................................................................8-6
Figure 8-6 ROADM node by WSD9 boards and RMU9 boards ........................................................................8-7

Figure 8-7 Service grooming at node A..............................................................................................................8-8


Figure 8-8 Service grooming at node B..............................................................................................................8-9
Figure 8-9 Service grooming at node C............................................................................................................8-10

Figure 8-10 ROADM node by WSD9 boards and WSM9 boards....................................................................8-11


Figure 8-11 Service grooming at node A..........................................................................................................8-12
Figure 8-12 Service grooming at node B..........................................................................................................8-13

Figure 8-13 Service grooming at node C..........................................................................................................8-14


Figure 8-14 Inter-ring grooming ROADM node ..............................................................................................8-16
Figure 8-15 Inter-ring grooming.......................................................................................................................8-17

Figure 8-16 Grooming from west to east..........................................................................................................8-18


Figure 8-17 Grooming from west to north .......................................................................................................8-19
Figure 8-18 Grooming from west to south .......................................................................................................8-20

Figure 8-19 Slots in the OptiX OSN 6800 .......................................................................................................8-21

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Tables

Table 8-1 Services supported by the OTU board integrated grooming.............................................................8-21


Table 8-2 Services supported by the OTU board distributed grooming. ..........................................................8-22

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary v


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services

8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services

About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

Section Describes

8.1 Dynamic Optical Layer Two ways to realize dynamic optical layer grooming.
Grooming They are intra-ring grooming and inter-ring grooming.
8.2 Electrical Layer Grooming Two ways to realize electrical layer grooming. They are
centralized grooming and distributed grooming.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-1


OptiX OSN 6800
8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services Product Description

8.1 Dynamic Optical Layer Grooming


Dynamic optical layer grooming can be divided into intra-ring grooming and inter-ring
grooming, or into two-dimensional grooming and multi-dimensional grooming.
Dimension refers to transmission direction. Two-dimensional grooming refers to wavelength
grooming in two transmission directions. Multi-dimensional grooming refers to that in
multiple transmission directions.
Dynamic optical layer grooming is realized by ROAM, WSD9, WSM9, and RMU9. For
details, refer to OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware
Description.

8.1.1 Intra-Ring Wavelength Grooming by ROAM Boards


Function
ROADM nodes realized by ROAM boards can add/drop any of less than 40 wavelengths at a
given port. ROAM boards realize functions such as add/drop, passing through, blocking,
channel optical power equalization and optical power detection for dynamic grooming of
service wavelengths in the ring networks.
ROADM nodes realized by ROAM boards can remotely dynamically adjust the status of
wavelength adding/dropping and passing through with T2000 software.

Application
At nodes where a large quantity of wavelengths are added and dropped, intra-ring grooming
by ROAM boards is recommended.

Node Structure
One ROADM node consists of two ROAM boards as shown in Figure 8-1.
Main optical path signals from west are amplified and input through the IN port of ROAM
board 1.Then the main path signals are split into two same wavelength signals. Those to be
dropped are output through the DM port. Signals to pass through are output through the
EXPO port.
The wavelengths after passing through ROAM board1 are input through the EXPI port of the
ROAM board 2. Wavelengths added locally are input through port from M01 to M40. The
dropping wavelengths in ROAM board 1 are blocked in ROAM board 2. The other
wavelengths are multiplexed with those added from east. Then they are output through the
OUT port. The main signals are amplified and sent to the line for transmission.
The grooming of wavelength signals transmitted from east to west is in the same way.

8-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services

Figure 8-1 ROADM node by ROAM boards

OD
DCM
DM M01 M02 M40
IN EXPO EXPI OUT
OA OA

ROAM ROAM
1 2
OUT EXPI EXPO IN
OA OA
M01 M02 M40 DM
West DCM East
OD

Signal Flow
Figure 8-2 shows engineering project T which is a ring network by station A, B, C, and D. All
of the four stations are ROADM nodes by ROAM boards.

Figure 8-2 Intra-ring grooming

D B

West East

Suppose that service X is input at node A, passes through node B, and is to be output at node
C. The grooming process is as follows.
z Service X is input at node A and output eastward.
Service X is input at node A and enters the M01 to M40 port of the ROAM. Then it is
output from the OUT port. The main optical signals containing service X are amplified
and output at node A eastward. Figure 8-3 shows the signal flow of node A.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-3


OptiX OSN 6800
8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services Product Description

Figure 8-3 Service grooming at node A

OD
DCM
DM
IN EXPO
D B OA

ROAM

OUT EXPI
OA
West
M01 M02 M40

West East
A
OD
Service X DCM
DM
IN EXPO
OA

ROAM
OUT EXPI
OA
East
M01 M02 M40
Service X

z Service X is input at node B and output eastward.


Service X is input at B from the west and amplified before entering the IN port of the
ROAM board. Then it passes through and is output through the EXPO port.
The passing through service X is input through the EXPI port of the east ROAM board
and is output through the OUT port. The main optical signals containing service X are
amplified and output at node B eastward. Figure 8-4 shows the signal flow of node B.

8-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services

Figure 8-4 Service grooming at node B

OD
DCM
Service X
DM
Service X IN EXPO
D B OA

ROAM

OUT EXPI
OA
West
M01 M02 M40

West East
A
OD
DCM
DM
IN EXPO
OA

ROAM
OUT EXPI
OA
East
M01 M02 M40

z The service is input at node C from west and is output.


The optical signals containing service X are input at node C from west. The main optical
signals are amplified and input through the IN port of the ROAM board. Service X to be
dropped is output through the DM port. The passing through signals are input through
the EXPI port of the east ROAM board which blocks the wavelength of service X.
Figure 8-5 shows the signal flow at node C.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-5


OptiX OSN 6800
8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services Product Description

Figure 8-5 Service grooming at node C

Service X
C
OD
DCM
DM
Service X IN EXPO
OA
D B
ROAM

OUT EXPI
OA
West
M01 M02 M40

West East
OD
A DCM
DM
IN EXPO
OA

ROAM
OUT EXPI
OA
East
M01 M02 M40

Dynamic Grooming
Suppose that the requirement is changed. The service X needs to be input at node A, pass
through node B and node C, and to be output at node D. You only need to change the
corresponding configurations using the T2000 software.

8.1.2 Intra-Ring Wavelength Grooming by WSD9 Boards and


RMU9 Boards
Function
ROADM nodes by WSD9 boards and RMU9 boards can realize full dynamic wavelength
grooming in a ring network. They can also remotely and dynamically adjust the status of
wavelength adding/dropping and passing through using NE software.

Application
ROADM nodes by WSD9 boards and RMU9 boards are recommended for nodes whose
adding/dropping wavelengths need to be irrelevant with the optical port.

8-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services

Node Structure
One ROADM node consists of two WSD9 boards and two RMU9 boards as shown in Figure
8-6. Main path signals from west are amplified and input through the IN port of the WSD9
board.
The wavelengths that need to be output locally are output from the ports given in the
configuration. Output multiplexed signals are demultiplexed to single wavelengths by the
demultiplexer before senting to the local client device by OTU. Output single wavelengths
can be directly sent to the local client device by OTU.
Optical wavelengths not to be added/dropped locally are output through the EXPO port of the
WSD9.
The locally input optical signals are multiplexed by the RMU9 board and output through the
TOA port.
The passing through main optical signals are input through the EXPI port of the RMU9 board.
Short the TOA port and ROA port. The wavelengths input through ROA port are multiplexed
with those input through EXPI port and are together output through OUT port. Then the main
path optical signals are amplified and sent to the line for transmission.
The grooming of wavelength signals transmitted from east to west is in the same way.

Figure 8-6 ROADM node by WSD9 boards and RMU9 boards

OD OM

DM1 DM8 AM1 AM8


TOA
DCM
ROA

IN WSD9 EXPO EXPI RMU9 OUT


OA OA

OUT EXPI EXPO IN


OA OA
ROA RMU9 WSD9

West TOA East


DCM

AM1 AM8 DM1 DM8

OM OD

Signal Flow
Figure 8-2 shows engineering project T which is a ring network by station A, B, C, and D. All
of the four stations are ROAMD nodes by WSD9 boards and RMU9 boards.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-7


OptiX OSN 6800
8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services Product Description

Suppose that service X is input at node A, passes through node B, and is to be output at node
C. The grooming process is as follows.
z Service X is input at node A and output eastward.
Service X is input at node A. It is input through the adding port of the RMU9 board and
multiplexed before it is output through TOA port. Short the TOA port and the ROA port,
then the service is output through OUT port. The main optical signals containing service
X are amplified and output at node A eastward.
Figure 8-7 shows the signal flow of node A.

Figure 8-7 Service grooming at node A

C DM1 DM7 DM8


DCM

IN EXPO
OA WSD9

D B

OUT EXPI
OA
West
ROA RMU9
TOA

AM1 AM7 AM8


West East
A DM1 DM7 DM8
DCM
Service X
IN EXPO
OA WSD9

OUT EXPI
OA
RMU9
East ROA
TOA

AM1 AM7 AM8


Service X

z Service X is input at node B and output eastward.


Service X is input at B from the west and amplified before entering the IN port of the
WSD9 board. Then it passes through and is output through the EXPO port.
The passing through service X is input through the EXPI port of the east RMU9 board
and is output through the OUT port. The main optical signals containing service X are
amplified and output at node B eastward.

8-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services

Figure 8-8 shows the signal flow of node B.

Figure 8-8 Service grooming at node B

C DM1 DM7 DM8


DCM

Service X IN EXPO
Service X OA WSD9

D B
OUT EXPI
OA
West
ROA RMU9
TOA

AM1 AM7 AM8


West East

A DM1 DM7 DM8


DCM

IN EXPO
OA WSD9

OUT EXPI
OA
East RMU9
ROA
TOA

AM1 AM7 AM8

z The service is input at node C from west and is output.


The optical signals containing service X are input at node C from west. The main optical
signals are amplified and input through the IN port of the WSD9 board. Service X to be
dropped is output through the dropping port and is terminated in the WSD9.
Figure 8-9 shows the signal flow at node C.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-9


OptiX OSN 6800
8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services Product Description

Figure 8-9 Service grooming at node C

Service X DM1 DM7 DM8


C DCM

Service X IN EXPO
OA WSD9

D B
OUT EXPI
OA
West
ROA RMU9
TOA

AM1 AM7 AM8

West East
DM1 DM7 DM8
A DCM

IN EXPO
OA WSD9

OUT EXPI
OA
RMU9
East ROA
TOA

AM1 AM7 AM8

Dynamic Grooming
Suppose that the requirement is changed. The service X needs to be input at node A, pass
through node B and node C, and to be output at node D. You only need to change the
corresponding configurations using the T2000 software.

8.1.3 Intra-Ring Wavelength Grooming by WSD9 Boards and


WSM9 Boards
Function
ROADM nodes by WSD9 boards and WSM9 boards can realize full dynamic wavelength
grooming in a ring network. They can also remotely and dynamically adjust the status of
wavelength adding/dropping and passing through using NE software.

8-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services

Application
ROADM nodes by WSD9 boards and WSM9 boards are recommended for nodes with
possible requirement for multi-dimensional maintenance.

Node Structure
One ROADM node consists of two WSD9 boards and two WSM9 boards as shown in Figure
8-10.
Main path signals from west are amplified and input through the IN port of the WSD9 board.
The wavelengths that need to be output locally are output from port DM1 to DM8 according
to the configuration. Output multiplexed signals are demultiplexed by the demultiplexer into
separate wavelengths. Then they go through the OTU and are sent to the local client-side
equipment. Output single wavelengths can be directly sent to the local client-side equipment.
Optical wavelengths not to be added/dropped locally are output through the EXPO port of the
WSD9.
The optical signals input locally are input through port AM1 to AM8 of the WSM9 board. The
passing through main optical signals are input through the EXPI port of the WSM9 board. The
wavelength input through port AM1 to AM8 are multiplexed with that input through EXPI
port and output through OUT port. Then the main path optical signals are amplified and sent
to the line for transmission.
The grooming of wavelength signals transmitted from east to west is in the same way.

Figure 8-10 ROADM node by WSD9 boards and WSM9 boards

OD OM

DM1 DM8 AM1 AM8

DCM

IN WSD9 EXPO EXPI WSM9 OUT


OA OA

OUT EXPI EXPO IN


OA OA
WSM9 WSD9

West DCM East

AM1 AM8 DM1 DM8

OM OD

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-11


OptiX OSN 6800
8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services Product Description

Signal Flow
Figure 8-2 shows engineering project T which is a ring network by station A, B, C, and D. All
of the four stations are ROAMD nodes by WSD9 boards and WSM9 boards.
Suppose that service X is input at node A, passes through node B, and is to be output at node
C. The grooming process is as follows.
z Service X is input at node A and output eastward.
Service X is input at node A. It is input through the adding port of the WSM9 board and
multiplexed before it is output through OUT port. The main optical signals containing
service X are amplified and output at node A eastward.
Figure 8-11 shows the signal flow of node A.

Figure 8-11 Service grooming at node A

C DM1 DM7 DM8


DCM

IN EXPO
OA WSD9

D B

OUT EXPI
OA WSM9
West

AM1 AM7 AM8

West East DM1


A DM7 DM8
DCM
Service X
IN EXPO
OA WSD9

OUT EXPI
OA WSM9
East

AM1 AM7 AM8


Service X

z Service X is input at node B and output eastward.


Service X is input at B from the west and amplified before entering the IN port of the
WSD9 board. Then it passes through and is output through the EXPO port.

8-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services

The passing through service X is input through the EXPI port of the east WSM9 board
and is output through the OUT port. The main optical signals containing service X are
amplified and output at node B eastward.
Figure 8-12 shows the signal flow of node B.

Figure 8-12 Service grooming at node B

C DM1 DM7 DM8


DCM
Service X Service X IN EXPO
OA WSD9

D B

OUT EXPI
OA WSM9
West

AM1 AM7 AM8


West East
A
DM1 DM7 DM8
DCM

IN EXPO
OA WSD9

OUT EXPI
OA WSM9
East

AM1 AM7 AM8

z The service is input at node C from west and is output.


The optical signal containing service X is input at node C from west. The main optical
signals are amplified and input through the IN port of the WSD9 board. Service X to be
dropped is output through the dropping port.
Figure 8-13 shows the signal flow at node C.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-13


OptiX OSN 6800
8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services Product Description

Figure 8-13 Service grooming at node C

C DM1 DM7 DM8


DCM

Service X IN EXPO
OA WSD9

D B

OUT EXPI
OA WSM9
West

AM1 AM7 AM8


West East
DM1 DM7 DM8
A DCM

IN EXPO
OA WSD9

OUT EXPI
OA WSM9
East

AM1 AM7 AM8

Dynamic Grooming
Suppose that the requirement is changed. The service X needs to be input at node A, pass
through node B and node C, and to be output at node D. You only need to change the
corresponding configurations using the T2000 software.

8.1.4 Inter-Ring Wavelength Grooming by WSD9 Boards and


RMU9 Boards
Function
ROADM nodes by WSD9 boards and RMU9 boards can realize four-dimensional inter-ring
full dynamic wavelength grooming. They can also remotely and dynamically adjust the status
of wavelength adding/dropping and passing through using NE software.

8-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services

Application
For nodes that require less than four-dimensional wavelength grooming, wavelength
grooming by the WSD9 and the RMU9 is recommended.
For nodes that require more than four-dimensional wavelength grooming, wavelength
grooming by the WSD9 and the WSM9 is recommended.

Node Structure
One ROADM node consists of four WSD9 boards and four RMU9 boards as shown in Figure
8-14. The signal grooming from west to east, south, and north is taken for example. Grooming
of the signals from the east, south, and north are the same.
Main path signals from west are amplified and input through the IN port of the WSD9 board.
Wavelengths to be groomed are output through the EXPO port or any of the DM1 to DM8 of
the WSD9 board.
If the service signals need to be output eastward, the signals from west are input through any
of the AM1 to AM8 of the east RMU9 board. The input optical signals are multiplexed by the
RMU9 board and output through the TOA port. The signals are amplified and output
eastward.
If the service signals need to be output southward or northward, the signal flow is the same
with those that are output eastward.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-15


OptiX OSN 6800
8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services Product Description

Figure 8-14 Inter-ring grooming ROADM node

DM1 DM1

IN IN IN
OA WSD9 DM7 DM7 WSD9 OA
DM8 DM8

EXPO EXPO
OUT EXPI EXPI OUT
ROA AM1 AM1 ROA

RMU9 RMU9
TOA TOA
O
OAA OA
West AM7 AM7 East
AM8 AM8

DM1 DM1

IN IN WSD9 DM7 DM7


WSD9 IN
OA OA
DM8 DM8

EXPO EXPO
EXPI EXPI OUT
OUT
ROA AM1 AM1 ROA

RMU9 RMU9
TOA TOA
OA OA
South AM7 AM7
North
AM8 AM8

From west to east


From west to north
From west to south

Signal Flow
Figure 8-15 shows engineering project T which is a tangent ring network by station A, B, C, D,
E, F and G. Station A is ROAMD node by WSD9 boards and RMU9 boards.

8-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services

Figure 8-15 Inter-ring grooming

D B

West A East

South North

From west to east


From west to north
From west to south
F

z Suppose that service X is input at Node A from west and needs to be output eastward.
The main path signals containing service X are input at Node A westward. The main path
signals are amplified and input through port IN of the WSD9 board. Wavelengths to be
groomed are output through the EXPO port or any of the DM1 to DM8 of the WSD9 board.
If the service signals need to be output eastward, the signals from west are input through any
of the AM1 to AM8 of the east RMU9 board. The input optical signals are multiplexed by the
RMU9 board and output through the TOA port. The signals are amplified and output
eastward.
Figure 8-16 shows the signal flow from west to east.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-17


OptiX OSN 6800
8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services Product Description

Figure 8-16 Grooming from west to east

DM1 DM1

IN IN IN
OA WSD9 DM7 DM7 WSD9 OA
DM8 DM8

EXPO EXPO
OUT EXPI EXPI OUT
ROA AM1 AM1 ROA

RMU9 RMU9
O TOA TOA
OAA OA
AM7 AM7
West AM8 AM8 East

DM1 DM1

IN IN WSD9 DM7 DM7


WSD9 IN
OA OA
DM8 DM8

EXPO EXPO
OUT EXPI EXPI OUT

ROA AM1 AM1 ROA

RMU9 RMU9
TOA TOA
OA OA
AM7 AM7
South AM8 AM8 North

z Suppose that service X is input at Node A from west and needs to be output northward.
The main path signals containing service X are input at Node A westward. The main path
signals are amplified and input through port IN of the WSD9 board. Wavelengths to be
groomed are output through the EXPO port or any of the DM1 to DM8 of the WSD9 board.
If the service signals need to be output northward, the signals from west are input through any
of the AM1 to AM8 of the north RMU9 board. The input optical signals are multiplexed by
the RMU9 board and output through the TOA port. The signals are amplified and output
northward.
Figure 8-17 shows the signal flow from west to north.

8-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services

Figure 8-17 Grooming from west to north

DM1 DM1

IN IN IN
OA WSD9 DM7 DM7 WSD9 OA
DM8 DM8

EXPO EXPO
OUT EXPI EXPI OUT
ROA AM1 AM1 ROA

RMU9 RMU9
TOA TOA
O
OAA OA
AM7 AM7
West AM8 East
AM8

DM1 DM1

IN IN WSD9 DM7 DM7


WSD9 IN
OA OA
DM8 DM8
EXPO EXPO
OUT EXPI EXPI OUT

ROA AM1 AM1 ROA

RMU9 RMU9
TOA TOA
OA OA
AM7 AM7
South AM8 AM8 North

z Suppose that service X is input at Node A from west and needs to be output southward.
The main path signals containing service X are input at Node A southward. The main path
signals are amplified and input through port IN of the WSD9 board. Wavelengths to be
groomed are output through the EXPO port or any of the DM1 to DM8 of the WSD9 board.
If the service signals need to be output southward, the signals from west are input through any
of the AM1 to AM8 of the east RMU9 board. The input optical signals are multiplexed by the
RMU9 board and output through the TOA port. The signals are amplified and output
southward.
Figure 8-18 shows the signal flow from west to south.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-19


OptiX OSN 6800
8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services Product Description

Figure 8-18 Grooming from west to south

DM1 DM1

IN IN IN
OA WSD9 DM7 DM7 WSD9 OA
DM8 DM8

EXPO EXPO
OUT EXPI EXPI OUT

ROA AM1 AM1 ROA

RMU9 RMU9
TOA TOA
O
OAA OA
AM7 AM7
West AM8 AM8 East

DM1 DM1

IN IN WSD9 DM7 DM7


WSD9 IN
OA OA
DM8 DM8

EXPO EXPO
OUT EXPI EXPI OUT

ROA AM1 AM1 ROA

RMU9 RMU9
TOA TOA
OA OA
AM7 AM7
South AM8 AM8 North

Dynamic Grooming
Suppose that the requirement is changed. The service X needs to be input from east and
output northward. You only need to change the corresponding configurations using the T2000
software.
ROADM nodes by WSD9 boards and WSM9 boards can realize inter-ring full dynamic
wavelength grooming in eight dimensions. They can also remotely and dynamically adjust the
status of wavelength adding/dropping and passing through using NE software. The grooming
is the same with that of ROADM nodes by WSD9 boards and RMU9 boards.

8.2 Electrical Layer Grooming


The OptiX OSN 6800 provides two types of electrical grooming:
z Integrated grooming of GE services and ODU1 signals realized by XCS
z Distributed grooming of GE services, ODU1 signals and Any services

8-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services

8.2.1 Integrated Grooming


As shown in Figure 8-19, when an XCS board is in the subrack, the XCS board can realize
full cross connection among the 14 slots of IU1–IU8 and IU11–IU16.
The OptiX OSN 6800 supports integrated grooming of GE services or ODU1 signals by the
XCS board:
z It supports a maximum of 160 Gbit/s cross grooming capacity of GE services.
z It supports a maximum of 320 Gbit/s cross grooming capacity of ODU1 signals.

Figure 8-19 Slots in the OptiX OSN 6800

PIU
XCS

OTU

SCC
XCS
OTU
OTU

OTU

OTU
OTU

OTU

OTU
OTU

OTU

OTU
OTU

OTU

OTU

SCC

PIU
IU10

IU11
IU12

IU13
IU14

IU15

IU16

IU17
IU18
IU1
IU2

IU3

IU4
IU5

IU6

IU7
IU8

IU9

AUX
Table 8-1 lists the services supported by the OTU board integrated grooming.

Table 8-1 Services supported by the OTU board integrated grooming.

Board Integrated Grooming

L4G GE services
LDGS/LDGD GE services
NS2 ODU1 signals
TDG GE services
ODU1 signals
TQS ODU1 signals
TQM ODU1 signals

8.2.2 Distributed Grooming


As shown in Table 8-2, the OptiX OSN 6800 supports seven pair slots: IU1 and IU2, IU3 and
IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-21


OptiX OSN 6800
8 Grooming of Wavelengths and Services Product Description

The OptiX OSN 6800 supports distributed grooming of GE services, Any services or ODU1
signals by the backplane:
z It supports a maximum of 5 Gbit/s cross grooming capacity of GE services.
z It supports a maximum of 10 Gbit/s cross grooming capacity of Any services.
z It supports a maximum of 10 Gbit/s cross grooming capacity of ODU1 signals.
Table 8-2 lists the distributed grooming supported by the OTU.

Table 8-2 Services supported by the OTU board distributed grooming.


Board Distributed Grooming

L4G GE services
LDGS/LDGD GE services
LQMS/LQMD Any services
NS2 ODU1 signals
TDG GE services
ODU1 signals
TQS ODU1 signals
TQM ODU1 signals
Any services

8.2.3 Application of Electrical Layer Grooming


The following three types of typical application are supported by electrical grooming.
z Passing through on the client side: The services are input from a client-side port of the
local station and are output through another client-side port. This is to say, the services
are not transmitted through the fiber line.
z Adding and dropping on the client side: The services of the other stations are transmitted
through the fiber to the local station, and then are output, or the client services are input
from the local station and are transmitted to the other station through the fiber.
z Passing through on the line side: The services are not added or dropped in the local
station. The local station functions as a regeneration station and sends the services from
one side of the fiber line to the other side.

8-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Contents

9 Protection .....................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Equipment Level Protection..........................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.1 DC Input Protection .............................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.2 Centralized Power Protection...............................................................................................................9-2
9.1.3 SCC Board 1+1 Protection...................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.4 Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection...................................................................................................9-2
9.2 Network Level Protection .............................................................................................................................9-3
9.2.1 Optical Line Protection ........................................................................................................................9-4
9.2.2 Intra-Board 1+1 Protection ..................................................................................................................9-7
9.2.3 Client-Side 1+1 Protection.................................................................................................................9-11
9.2.4 Subnetwork Connect Protection.........................................................................................................9-14
9.3 Network Management Channel...................................................................................................................9-18
9.3.1 Protection of Network Management Information Channel ................................................................9-18
9.3.2 Interconnection of Network Management Channel ...........................................................................9-20

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Figures

Figure 9-1 Working principle of optical line protection .....................................................................................9-5


Figure 9-2 Application of optical line protection (normal).................................................................................9-6
Figure 9-3 Application of optical line protection (switching) ............................................................................9-6

Figure 9-4 Working principle of Intra-board 1+1 protection (OTU) ..................................................................9-8


Figure 9-5 Working principle of intra-board 1+1 protection (OLP)...................................................................9-9
Figure 9-6 Application of Intra-board 1+1 protection (normal) .......................................................................9-10

Figure 9-7 Application of Intra-board 1+1 protection (switching) ...................................................................9-10


Figure 9-8 Working principle of client-side 1+1 protection .............................................................................9-12
Figure 9-9 Application of client-side 1+1 protection (normal).........................................................................9-13

Figure 9-10 Application of client-side 1+1 protection (switching) ..................................................................9-13


Figure 9-11 Working principle of the SW SNCP..............................................................................................9-15
Figure 9-12 Working principle of the ODUk SNCP.........................................................................................9-16

Figure 9-13 Application of the subnetwork connect protection (normal).........................................................9-17


Figure 9-14 Application of the subnetwork connect protection (switching) ....................................................9-18
Figure 9-15 Network management protection in ring network (a certain section fails) ...................................9-19

Figure 9-16 Network management through the normal supervisory channel...................................................9-19


Figure 9-17 Network management through the DCN supervisory channel......................................................9-20
Figure 9-18 Supervision over OptiX transmission network .............................................................................9-20

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Tables

Table 9-1 Classification of network level protection schemes............................................................................9-3


Table 9-2 Protection types supported by the OptiX OSN 6800 ..........................................................................9-3
Table 9-3 Boards used to achieve the optical line protection..............................................................................9-4

Table 9-4 Boards used to achieve the Intra-board 1+1 protection ......................................................................9-7
Table 9-5 Boards used to achieve the client-side 1+1 protection......................................................................9-11
Table 9-6 Boards used to achieve the wavelength cross-connection protection ...............................................9-14

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary v


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 9 Protection

9 Protection

About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

Section Describes

9.1 Equipment Level Principle and application of input power supply


Protection protection, integrated power supply protection, SCC
board 1+1 protection and cross-connect board 1+1
protection.
9.2 Network Level Protection Principle and application of optical line protection,
intra-board 1+1 protection, client-side 1+1 protection, and
SNCP protection.
9.3 Network Management Network management channel and interconnection of the
Channel network management information channel.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-1


OptiX OSN 6800
9 Protection Product Description

9.1 Equipment Level Protection


The OptiX OSN 6800 offers four types of equipment level protection:
z DC input protection
z Centralized power protection
z SCC board 1+1 protection
z Cross-connect board 1+1 protection

9.1.1 DC Input Protection


The power supply system supports two –48 V/– 60V DC power inputs for mutual backup.
Therefore, the equipment remains normal in case either of the two DC inputs is faulty.

9.1.2 Centralized Power Protection


The system performs distributed power supply and integrated protection upon the secondary
power of all units except that of the XCS.
The system control and communication (SCC) board contains power backup unit (PBU) and
can provide 1:N power backup for the system. The system uses the SCC board to provide
integrated power protection and secondary power backup upon the +3.3 V power supply of all
units in every subrack except that of the XCS.
When the system detects a power fault (overvoltage or undervoltage) in units other than the
XCS, the PBU of the SCC begins to supply power within 600ȝs to ensure that the OTU works
normally.

The SCC supports power supply switching of one OTU board. The working power supply is off upon
overvoltage and switches to the PBU. The working power supply remains on upon undervoltage and
switches to the PBU.

9.1.3 SCC Board 1+1 Protection


The SCC adopts 1+1 backup. When the active SCC is in normal status, the standby SCC is in
backup status. When the standby SCC receives information about abnormal active SCC or
when the NM system issues a switching command, the standby SCC takes over the work from
the active SCC, sets itself to be in working status, and reports a switching event.

9.1.4 Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection


The XCS adopts 1+1 backup. When the active XCS is working normally, the standby XCS is
in backup status with the same cross matrix. When the standby XCS receives information
about abnormal active XCS or when the NM system issues a switching command, the standby
XCS takes over the work from the active XCS, sets itself to be in working status, and reports
a switching event.

9-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 9 Protection

9.2 Network Level Protection


The OptiX OSN 6800 offers many types of network level protection. Table 9-1 lists all the
protection schemes.

Table 9-1 Classification of network level protection schemes


Type Scheme

Optical line protection Optical line protection


Optical channel protection Intra-board 1+1 protection
Client-side 1+1 protection
SNCP protection SW SNCP protection
ODUk SNCP protection
VLAN SNCP protection

Table 9-2 shows the different types of system protection.

Table 9-2 Protection types supported by the OptiX OSN 6800

Protection Type Restoration Type Function

Optical line Non-revertive It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of
protection Revertive the OLP board, to protect line fibers between adjacent
stations by using diverse routing.
Default: Non-revertive
Client-side 1+1 Non-revertive It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of
protection Revertive the OLP/DCP/SCS board, to protect the OTU board and
the OCh fibers.
Default: Non-revertive
Intra-board 1+1 Non-revertive It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of
protection Revertive the OTU/OLP/DCP board, to protect the OCh fibers by
using diverse routing.
Default: Non-revertive
SW SNCP Non-revertive It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of
protection Revertive the electrical layer grooming, to protect the line board
and the OCh fibers. The cross-connect granularity is GE
Default: Non-revertive services or any services.
ODUk SNCP Non-revertive It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of
protection Revertive the electrical layer grooming, to protect the line board
and the OCh fibers. The cross-connect granularity is
Default: Non-revertive ODU1 signals.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-3


OptiX OSN 6800
9 Protection Product Description

Protection Type Restoration Type Function

VLAN SNCP Non-revertive It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of
protection Revertive L2 module, to protect the line board and the OCh fibers.
The protection granularity is the service with VLAN on
Default: Revertive the client-side port.

9.2.1 Optical Line Protection


Functionality
Optical line protection protects line fibers between adjacent stations by using the dual fed and
selective receiving function of OLP boards.

Related Boards
Table 9-3 lists the boards used to achieve the optical line protection.

Table 9-3 Boards used to achieve the optical line protection

Board Function

OLP Splits and selects the line signals.


Detects optical power.
Performs the switching when the optical power difference between the
working channel and the protection channel crosses the threshold or
when the LOS alarm of the working channel occurs.

Working Principle
The optical line adopts two pairs of fibers. One pair functions as the working route to transmit
the service signals in normal cases. The other pair functions as the protection route to carry
the protection switching signals when a fiber break occurs or the signal attenuation is too
large.
This protection scheme adopts dual-fed signal selection and unidirectional switching. As
shown in Figure 9-1, the RI1 and TO1 optical ports are connected by the working line fibers,
and the RI2 and TO2 optical ports are connected by the protection line fibers.
For the description of the working principle of the OLP board, refer to the OptiX OSN 6800
Optical Intelligent Transport Platform Hardware Description.

9-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 9 Protection

Figure 9-1 Working principle of optical line protection

OTU1 TO1 RI1 OTU1

OM OA RI1 TO1 OA OD
TI RO
OTUn OTUn
F O O F
I L L I SC1
SC1 U RO P P TI U
OTU1 TO2 RI2 OTU1

OD OA RI2 TO2 OA OM

OTUn OTU n

: Direction of the working signal flow : Direction of the protection signal flow

The OTU is a transceiver and is able to process the receiving and transmitting of the same wavelength at
the same time. In Figure 9-1, the receiving OTU and the transmitting OTU in one station are physically
one board.
z In the transmit direction, the multiplexed signals are input through the TI port. The OLP
board sends the signals to the working line fiber through TO1 port and sends the signals
to the protection line fiber through the TO2 port at the same time.
z In the receive direction, the same two multiplexed signals are respectively received from
the working line fiber and the protection line fiber. These signals are input through RI1
and RI2. The OLP detects and compares the optical power of the two signals and
controls the protection switching of the working channel and the protection channel.
z In normal cases, the OLP sends the working signals from the RI1 port to the FIU board.
When a LOS alarm of working channel occurs or when the optical power difference
between the working channel and the protection channel cross the threshold, the OLP
board sends the signals from the RI2 port to the FIU board. In this way, the line signals
are automatically switched to the protection line fiber.
z After the recovery of the working line fiber, the OLP board at the receive end detects that
the optical power of the line signals transmitted over the working line fiber is normal.
Based on the pre-configuration made on the NM, the line signals can be switched back to
the working line fiber, or still remain in the protection line fiber.

Application
As shown in Figure 9-2, station A and station B form a point-to-point network in project T.
Both A and B are OTM stations. The optical line protection is adopted between the two
stations. Each station is configured with an OLP board.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-5


OptiX OSN 6800
9 Protection Product Description

Figure 9-2 Application of optical line protection (normal)

O O
L L
P P

OTM A OTM B

: Direction of the working signal flow : Direction of the protection signal flow

See Figure 9-2.


When signals are transmitted from station A to station B, the OLP board in station A sends
signals over the working line fiber and the protection line fiber at the same time. The OLP
board in station B selects the signals transmitted over the working line fiber.
When signals are transmitted from station B to station A, the OLP board in station B sends
signals over the working line fiber and the protection line fiber at the same time. The OLP
board in station A selects the signals transmitted over the working line fiber.

Figure 9-3 Application of optical line protection (switching)

O O
L L
P P

OTM A OTM B

: Direction of the working signal flow : Direction of the protection signal flow

See Figure 9-3.


In the direction from station A to station B:
When the working line fiber breaks, the OLP board in station B detects that there are no
signals in the working receive direction. The board performs the switching. It selects the
signals transmitted over the protection line fiber.
In the direction from station B to station A:
There is no switching because the optical power is normal, and the route of signals remains
the same.

9-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 9 Protection

9.2.2 Intra-Board 1+1 Protection


Functionality
Intra-board 1+1 protection uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the OTU, the
OLP or the DCP, to protect the OCh fibers through diverse routing.
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides two types of intra-board 1+1 protection.
z It uses dual fed and selective receiving OTU to realize client service protection. (for 2.5
Gbit/s OTU)
z It uses dual fed and selective receiving OLP or DCP to realize client service protection.
(for 5 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s OTU)

Related Boards
Table 9-4 lists the boards used to achieve the intra-board 1+1 protection.

Table 9-4 Boards used to achieve the Intra-board 1+1 protection

Board Function

OTU Splits and selects the service signals.


Detects the signals.
Performs the switching when detecting abnormal signals.
OLP or DCP Splits and selects the service signals
(Optional) Detects the signals.
Performs the switching when the optical power difference between the
working channel and the protection channel crosses the threshold or
when the LOS alarm of the working channel occurs.

Working Principle
Intra-board 1+1 protection adopts dual fed and selective receiving and unidirectional
switching in chain networks and ring networks. In a chain network, the OTU intra-board 1+1
protection is similar to optical line protection and both of them need diverse routing at
adjacent stations. In a ring network, the OTU intra-board 1+1 protection uses diverse routing
of the ring network, that is, the services travel clockwise or anticlockwise in the ring to reach
the destination node.
Figure 9-4 shows the intra-board 1+1 protection realized by dual fed and selective receiving
OTU

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-7


OptiX OSN 6800
9 Protection Product Description

Figure 9-4 Working principle of Intra-board 1+1 protection (OTU)

SC2

OA OA
F F
I I
U OADM OTUQ OADM U

OA OA

West A East

SC2

OA OA
F F
I I
U OADM OTUQ OADM U

OA OA

B
East West

: Direction of the working signal flow : Direction of the protection signal flow

z In the transmit direction, the OTU that has the dual-fed signal selection function divides
the client-side services into two at the WDM side and feeds the signals into the east
OADM and the west OADM. Signals are transmitted to the receive end by different
optical routes.
z In the receive direction, the corresponding OTU detects the signals coming in east and
west directions. If the signals in the working route are normal, the working signals are
chosen by the OTU and sent to the client side.
z When the OTU at the receive end detects any failure in the working signals, the
protection signals are chosen by the OTU and sent to the client side.
z After the recovery of the working wavelength route, service signals can be switched back
to the working route or not based on the pre-configuration made on the NM.
Figure 9-5 shows the intra-board 1+1 protection realized by dual fed and selective receiving
OLP or DCP. For the working principle of the OLP and the DCP, refer to the OptiX OSN 6800
Optical Intelligent Transport Platform Hardware Description.

9-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 9 Protection

Figure 9-5 Working principle of intra-board 1+1 protection (OLP)

SC2

F OA OA F
I I
OTUn U
U OADM OADM
OLP
OA OA

A
West East

SC2

OA OA
F F
I OLP I
U OADM OADM U
OTUn
OA OA

B
East West

: Direction of the working signal flow : Direction of the protection signal flow

z In the transmit direction, the OLP or DCP board that has the dual-fed signal selection
function divides the incoming client signals and feeds the signals into the east OADM
and the west OADM. Signals are transmitted to the receive end by different optical
routes.
z In the receive direction, the corresponding OLP or DCP at the receive end detects the
signals coming in east and west directions. If the signals in the working route are normal,
the working signals are chosen by the OLP or the DCP and sent to the client side.
z When a LOS alarm of the working channel occurs or when the optical power difference
between the working channel and the protection channel crosses the threshold, the
protection signals are chosen by the OLP or the DCP and sent to the client side.
z After the recovery of the working wavelength route, service signals can be switched back
to the working route or not based on the pre-configuration made on the NM.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-9


OptiX OSN 6800
9 Protection Product Description

When the working channel returns to normal, the service signals travel in the protection fiber by default.
That is to say, the restoration mode of intra-board 1+1 protection is non-revertive.

Application
The intra-board 1+1 protection realized by the OLP or DCP and that realized by dual fed and
selective receiving OTU share the same application. The latter is taken for example.
As shown in Figure 9-6, station A and station B form a ring network in project T. Both A and
B are OADM stations. The Intra-board 1+1 protection is adopted between the two stations.
Each station is configured with an OTU board (with the dual-fed signal selection function).

Figure 9-6 Application of Intra-board 1+1 protection (normal)

OTU OTU
Client
Client

OADM A OADM B

: Direction of the working signal flow : Direction of the protection signal flow

See Figure 9-6.


The OTU in station A sends signals to station B by the working route and the protection route
at the same time. When signals reach station B, only the signals in the working route are sent
to the client-side equipment by the OTU.
Similarly, the OTU in station B sends signals to station A by two routes at the same time. In
station A, only the signals in the working route are sent to the client-side equipment.

Figure 9-7 Application of Intra-board 1+1 protection (switching)

OTU OTU
Client
Client

OADM A OADM B

: Direction of the working signal flow : Direction of the protection signal flow

See Figure 9-7.


When the working route between A and B is faulty, the receive OTU board chooses the
protection route and sends the protection signals to the client side.

9-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 9 Protection

9.2.3 Client-Side 1+1 Protection


Functionality
Client-side 1+1 protection uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the OLP, the
DCP or the SCS, to protect the OTU board and the OCh fibers.

Related Boards
Table 9-5 lists the boards used to achieve the client-side 1+1 protection.

Table 9-5 Boards used to achieve the client-side 1+1 protection


Board Function

SCS(optional) Splits and couples the service signals.


OLP or Splits and selects the line signals.
DCP(optional) Detects optical power.
Performs the switching when the optical power difference between the
working channel and the protection channel crosses the threshold or when
the LOS alarm of the working channel occurs.
OTU Detects the signals.
Reports the information of the detected signals to the SCC.
Turns on or shuts down the client-side laser under the control of the SCC.
SCC Communicates with the OTU, and controls the OTU to turn on or shut
down the client-side laser.

Working Principle
Client-side 1+1 protection is in three types.
z Intra-subrack client-side 1+1
This protection is utilized when the working OTU and the protection OTU are in the
same subrack of an NE. The SCS board is recommended for this type of protection.
z Inter-subrack client-side 1+1
This protection is utilized when the working OTU and the protection OTU are in
different subracks of an NE. The OLP or DCP board must be used for this type of
protection.
z Inter-NE client-side 1+1
This protection is utilized when the working OTU and the protection OTU are in
different NEs. The OLP or DCP board must be used for this type of protection.
The three types share the same protection principle. The difference lies in location of the
OTUs. Figure 9-8 shows the principle with intra-subrack client-side 1+1 protection as an
example.
For the description of the working principle of the SCS, OLP and DCP boards, refer to the
OptiX OSN 6800 Optical Intelligent Transport Platform Hardware Description.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-11


OptiX OSN 6800
9 Protection Product Description

Figure 9-8 Working principle of client-side 1+1 protection

TO11 RI11
a RI11 O O TO11 a
OM OD
T T RO1
TI1 FIU FIU
RO1 TO21 U U RI21 TI1
RI21 1 OD OM 1 TO21
b SCS SCS b
TO12 RI12
TI2 O OM OD O TO12 RO2
RI12
RO2 T T
FIU FIU TI2
U U
TO22 2 OD OM RI22
RI22
2 TO22

: Direction of the working signal flow : Direction of the protection signal flow

The SCC board communicates with the OTU through the backplane. This communication is not
indicated in Figure 9-8.
z In the transmit direction, the SCS board at the transmit end splits each signal into two
channels. Then it sends them to the working OTU (OTU1) and the protection OTU
(OTU2). The working signals and the protection signals are transmitted to the receive
end respectively through the working route and the protection route.
z In the receive direction, the SCC at the receive end controls the OTU1 and the OTU2
based on the detection information reported by the OTU. All the client-side lasers of the
OTU1 function normally. All the client-side lasers of the OTU2 are shut down. Only the
signals transmitted by the working wavelength channel are sent to the client-side
equipment.
z When the OTU1 at the receive end detects a channel of signals is faulty, that trigger the
switching, the SCC board directs the OTU1 to shut down the corresponding client-side
laser. The client-side laser of the OTU2 for this channel is enabled. Thus, for this channel
of services, only the signals transmitted by the protection wavelength route are sent to
the SCS board. All the other channels of signals are not switched to the protection
wavelength route. They are still transmitted by the working wavelength route.
z After the recovery of the working wavelength route, service signals transmitted by the
protection wavelength route can be switched back to the OTU1 or not based on the
pre-configuration made on the NM.

Application
As shown in Figure 9-9, station A and station B form a point-to-point network in project T.
Both A and B are OTM stations. The client-side 1+1 protection is adopted between the two
stations. Each station is configured with one SCS board and two OTUs that have the
convergence function.

9-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 9 Protection

Figure 9-9 Application of client-side 1+1 protection (normal)

a a
O O
T T b
b U
U
Client
Client S 1 1 S a
a C a a C
S S
O O
T T b
b Client
Client U U
b 2 2 b
OTM A OTM B

: Direction of the working signal flow : Direction of the protection signal flow

See Figure 9-9.


When signals are transmitted from station A to station B, the SCS board in station A sends
signals to the working OTU (OTU1) and the protection OTU (OTU2) at the same time. When
signals reach the OTU1 and OTU2 in station B, only the signals sent from the OTU1 are
transmitted to the client-side equipment through the SCS board.
When signals are transmitted from station B to station A, the SCS board in station B sends
signals to the OTU1 and the OTU2 at the same time. In station A, only the signals sent from
the OTU1 are transmitted to the client-side equipment through the SCS board.

Figure 9-10 Application of client-side 1+1 protection (switching)

a a
O O
T T b
b U
U
Client
Client S 1 1 S a
a C a a C
S S
O O
T T b
b Client
Client U U
b 2 2 b
OTM A OTM B

: Direction of the working signal flow : Direction of the protection signal flow

See Figure 9-10.


In the direction from station A to station B:
In station A, the fiber (used to transmit client service a) between the SCS board and the input
port of the OTU1 breaks. After detection and control, only the OTU2 in station B sends the
client-side signals to the client-side equipment through the SCS board. Client service b is still
transmitted by the original route.
In the direction from station B to station A:

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-13


OptiX OSN 6800
9 Protection Product Description

There is no switching because the working wavelength route is normal, and the route of
signals remains the same.

9.2.4 Subnetwork Connect Protection


Functionality
SNCP uses the dual fed and selective receiving of the electrical layer cross connection to
protect the line board and the OCh fibers.

Related Boards
Table 9-6 lists the boards used to achieve the wavelength cross-connection protection.

Table 9-6 Boards used to achieve the wavelength cross-connection protection


Board Function

XCS (optional) Cross-connects the GE services and ODU1 signals to the OTUs in the
other slots.
Detects SF switching event and report it to the SCC.
Under the SCC control, switches cross matrix.
OTU Cross-connects GE/ODU1/Any signals.
Detects SF and SD switching event and report it to the SCC.
Under the SCC control, switches cross matrix.
SCC Receives the SF and SD switching event reported from the boards.
Processes and calculates cross matrix through protocols and issue cross
matrix to boards.

SNCP features dual fed and selective receiving. It realizes dual-fed by the cross grooming of the OTU.
The electrical cross grooming is of two types. One is distributed cross grooming, and the other one is
integrated cross grooming. The XCS board is used only for the latter.

Working Principle
The SNCP protects inter-subnet services and requires no protocol. The SNCP provides
protection for topologies such as ring with chain, tangent rings, intersecting rings. This
ensures high flexibility in application.
The subnetwork connect protection uses electrical cross connection to realize dual fed and
selective receiving. It offers three types of protection:
z SW SNCP protection
Granularity: Any services or GE services
z ODUk SNCP protection
Granularity: ODU services
z VLAN SNCP protection
Granularity: client-side port services indicated with VLAN

9-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 9 Protection

The VLAN SNCP and the SW SNCP share the same principle. Figure 9-11 shows the
principle with the SW SNCP as an example.

Figure 9-11 Working principle of the SW SNCP

F OA 2 OA F
OADM 1 OADM
I I
U U

OA OA

West A East

OA OA
F F
I 3 4 I
OADM OADM
U U

OA OA

East B West

: Direction of the working signal flow : Direction of the protection signal flow

z In Figure 9-11, 2 and 4 stand for the working OTU; 1 and 3 stand for the protection OTU. They can
realize dual fed and selective receiving by integrated or distributed cross grooming. Integrated cross
grooming use the XCS boards to realize dual fed and selective receiving, which is not shown in
Figure 9-11.
z The SCC board communicates with OTU through the backplane. This communication is not
indicated in Figure 9-11.
z At the transmit end, the client services to be protected are input through the working
OTU and are cross connected to the protection OTU. The working signals and the
protection signals are transmitted in the working channel and in the protection channel
respectively.
z At the receive end, when the operating is normal, only the cross connection of the
working OTU is enabled; that of the protection channel is disabled. When the working
channel is faulty, the cross connection of the working channel at the receive end is

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-15


OptiX OSN 6800
9 Protection Product Description

disabled. The cross connection of the protection channel corresponding to OTU 3 is


enabled. The services are transmitted in the working channel.
z After the working channel returns to normal, the service signals can be switched back to
the given OTU according to the existing configuration of restoration mode in the NM
system.
Figure 9-12 shows the principle of the ODUk SNCP.

Figure 9-12 Working principle of the ODUk SNCP

2 3
F OA OADM OADM OA F
I I
U U

OA OA

A
West East

OA OA
F 4 F
I I
U U
OADM 5 6 OADM

OA OA

East B West

: Direction of the working signal flow : Direction of the protection signal flow

9-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 9 Protection

z As shown in Figure 9-12, 1 and 4 are tributary boards; 2 and 5 are protection line boards; 3 and 6 are
working line boards. The tributary boards and the line boards use the XCS boards to realize dual fed
and selective receiving, which is not shown in Figure 9-12.
z The SCC and the line boards communicate through the backplane, which are not shown in Figure
9-12.
z In the transmit direction, the protected client services split into working signals and
protection signals through the XCS and are respectively sent to the working line board
and the protection line board. The working signals and the protection signals are
respectively transmitted in the working channel and the protection channel.
z In the receive direction, in normal cases, only the cross connection corresponding to the
working line board is enabled and that to the protection line board is disconnected. When
the working channel is faulty, the cross connection corresponding to the working line
board is disconnected and that to the protection line board is enabled. The service signals
are transmitted in the protection channel.
z After the working channel returns to normal, the service signals can be switched back to
the cross connection corresponding to the given line board according to the existing
configuration in the NM system.

Application
Figure 9-13 shows engineering project T which is a ring network by station A, B, C, and D.
Station A, B, C, and D are OADM stations. Service b between station A and station B adopts
SNCP protection realized by dual fed and selective receiving.

Figure 9-13 Application of the subnetwork connect protection (normal)

Client a OADM D
2 4 Client a

Client b Client b

Client C 1 3 Client C

OADM A OADM C OADM B

: Direction of the working signal flow : Direction of the protection signal flow

See Figure 9-13.


In normal cases, at the transmit end, the client service b is transmitted in the working channel
and the protection channel respectively through the OTU board 1 and OTU board 2. At the
receive end, only the working cross connection corresponding to OTU board 4 is enabled and
the protection cross connection corresponding to OTU board 3 is disconnected.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-17


OptiX OSN 6800
9 Protection Product Description

Figure 9-14 Application of the subnetwork connect protection (switching)

Client a
OADM D
2 Client a
4

Client b Client b

Client C Client C
1 3

OADM A OADM C OADM B

: Direction of the working signal flow : Direction of the protection signal flow

See Figure 9-14.


At the transmit end, client service b is transmitted in the protection channel through OTU
board 2. At the receive end, the working cross connection corresponding to OTU board 4 is
disconnected. The protection cross connection corresponding to OTU board 3 is enabled. The
protection channel works.

9.3 Network Management Channel


The OptiX OSN 6800 provides protection of network management information channel and
interconnection of network management information.

9.3.1 Protection of Network Management Information Channel


In a DWDM system, network management information is transmitted over an optical
supervisory channel, which shares the same physical channel with the working path. Any
anomaly or failure in the working path can affect the supervisory channel. Therefore, a
backup supervisory channel must be provided.
In a ring network, when fiber cut occurs in a certain direction, network management
information is automatically switched to the optical supervisory channel in the other direction
of the ring, as shown in Figure 9-15. This does not affect the management of the entire
network.

9-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 9 Protection

Figure 9-15 Network management protection in ring network (a certain section fails)

NE A NE B
Normal supervisory channel
NM

Management information
GNE

Management information

Normal supervisory channel


NE D NE C
Network cable Optical fiber

With data communication network (DCN), the OptiX OSN 6800 also provides network
management information channel. The user can choose ways to use the channel based on the
networking and spanning. In the point-to-point networking and chain networking, when both
the fiber transmission and the supervisory channel fail, the network becomes unmanageable.
This can be avoided by the network management information channel in DCN mode. The
system NE can provide network management information channel by the DCN.
To set up a DCN network management channel, access the DCN between the two NEs
through a router. With initial configuration, network management information is transmitted
over the normal supervisory channel when the network is normal. See Figure 9-16.

Figure 9-16 Network management through the normal supervisory channel


GNE NE
normal supervisory channel

Management information
NM

DCN
Network cable
Router DCN supervisory channel Router
Optical fiber

Upon a failure of the normal supervisory channel, network elements automatically switch the
management information to the DCN supervisory channel to guarantee the supervision and
operation on the entire network, as illustrated in Figure 9-17.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-19


OptiX OSN 6800
9 Protection Product Description

Figure 9-17 Network management through the DCN supervisory channel


GNE NE
Normal supervisory channel

NM
Management information

DCN
Network cable
Router DCN supervisory channel Router
Optical fiber

It is important to select different routes for the DCN supervisory channel and normal channel
during network planning. Otherwise the backup function does not take effective.

9.3.2 Interconnection of Network Management Channel


The OptiX OSN 6800 provides various data interfaces (for example Ethernet interface) for the
interconnection of network management channels among different DWDM networks, or
between a DWDM network and a SONET network, as shown in Figure 9-18. It enables
unified management of different transmission equipment.

Figure 9-18 Supervision over OptiX transmission network


Network
management
center
ADM

ADM ADM
Network SONET network
management
channel

OADM
ADM Network
management
OADM OADM channel
Network
WDM network management ADM
channel

ADM ADM

OADM SONET network

ADM

9-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Contents

10 Management of Optical Power............................................................................................10-1


10.1 Automatic Power Equilibrium...................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.1 Function Description........................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2 Function Implementation .................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.3 Networking of Application...............................................................................................................10-3
10.1.4 Configuration Principle....................................................................................................................10-4
10.2 Automatic Level Control...........................................................................................................................10-5
10.2.1 Function Description........................................................................................................................10-5
10.2.2 Function Implementation .................................................................................................................10-6
10.2.3 Networking of Application.............................................................................................................10-12
10.2.4 Configuration Principle..................................................................................................................10-13
10.3 Intelligent Power Adjustment..................................................................................................................10-13
10.3.1 Function Description......................................................................................................................10-13
10.3.2 Function Implementation ...............................................................................................................10-14
10.3.3 Configuration Principle..................................................................................................................10-15

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Figures

Figure 10-1 Flatness of the optical power at the receive site when APE is not activated.................................10-2
Figure 10-2 Flatness of the optical power at the receive site when APE is activated.......................................10-2
Figure 10-3 APE networking with M40V as the detection board.....................................................................10-3

Figure 10-4 APE networking with WSM9 as the detection board....................................................................10-4


Figure 10-5 System power with ALC inactivated ............................................................................................10-5
Figure 10-6 System power with ALC activated ...............................................................................................10-5

Figure 10-7 Optical power relationship between two nodes ............................................................................10-7


Figure 10-8 Flow chart of NE abnormity checking (gain mode)......................................................................10-8
Figure 10-9 Flow chart of ALC link pre-adjustment ......................................................................................10-10

Figure 10-10 Flow chart of ALC link adjustment ..........................................................................................10-11


Figure 10-11 Networking of ALC application................................................................................................10-12
Figure 10-12 Function description of the IPA ................................................................................................10-14

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 10 Management of Optical Power

10 Management of Optical Power

About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

Section Describes

10.1 Automatic Power Implementation and application of the APE.


Equilibrium
10.2 Automatic Level Control Implementation and application of the ALC.
10.3 Intelligent Power Implementation and application of the IPA.
Adjustment

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-1


OptiX OSN 6800
10 Management of Optical Power Product Description

10.1 Automatic Power Equilibrium


The OptiX OSN 6800 system provides the automatic power equilibrium (APE).

10.1.1 Function Description


In a DWDM system, the variety of the optical fiber condition in the running of the system
may change the flatness of a channel’s power from that in the commissioning, and degrade the
optical signal noise ratio (OSNR) of signals at the receive end, as shown in Figure 10-1. With
the APE function provided by the system, you can enable the system to automatically adjust
the optical power of the transmit end of each channel to keep the flatness of the optical power
of the receive end close to that in the commissioning and to maintain the OSNR, as shown in
Figure 10-2.

Figure 10-1 Flatness of the optical power at the receive site when APE is not activated

flatness of the optical power


at the recieve site

OTM OLA OADM OLA OTM

Figure 10-2 Flatness of the optical power at the receive site when APE is activated

flatness of the optical power


at the recieve site

OTM OLA OADM OLA OTM

The application of the APE streamlines the operation of the DWDM system commissioning
and subsequent network maintenance for the operator. The design of starting regulation
manually facilitates you to determine whether to adjust the optical power according to the
actual status of the network.

10.1.2 Function Implementation


Implementation Principles
To implement the APE, follow the steps below:
z During the commissioning, apply manual adjustment on the adjustment board to ensure
that each channel is working normally and that bit error rate and OSNR meet the
requirement.

10-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 10 Management of Optical Power

z After the commissioning, save the power curve of the receive end as the standard power
curve.
z Detect optical power of every channel received by the detection board (MCA4 or MCA8)
through the optical port at the receive end.
z According to the detected optical power of every channel, adjust the attenuation rate of
the according channel of the adjust board (M40V and WSM9), so as to maintain the
optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) of every channel at the receive end by keeping the
flatness of the optical power of every channel.
NOTE
During the running of the equipment, the MCA4 or MCA8 analyzes the data scanned in a spectral
scanning period, which is set in the MCA4 or MCA8 configuration and is not provided in the APE. If the
power offset exceeds the threshold configured, the system reports the event of optical power unbalance.
The user can enable the automatic adjustment or determine whether to adjust it based on the network
condition.

Involved Boards
The APE functions through the service board and the SCC board. The APE involves boards of
the following types:
z Detection board
It detects the signal power of the channels at the receive end and reports an APE uneven
event. The MCA4 or MCA8 functions as the detection board in the system.
z Adjustment board
It is the adjusting entity of the APE and adjusts the attenuation of channels. The M40V or
WSM9 functions as the adjustment board in the system.
z Supervisory channel board
It provides the supervisory channel and the physical channel for protocol frame
transmission. The SC1 or the SC2 functions as the supervisory channel board.
z System control and communication board
It is the executive entity of the APE. The SCC functions as the system control and
communication board.

10.1.3 Networking of Application


There are two typical applications of APE.
z The MCA detects the optical power of signals that are multiplexed by the M40V. Figure
10-3 shows the networking of this application and describes unidirectional APE only.

Figure 10-3 APE networking with M40V as the detection board

IN1
M01
MCA4
OUT /
M40V MCA8
INn
M40

Adjustment station Detection station

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-3


OptiX OSN 6800
10 Management of Optical Power Product Description

z The MCA detects the optical power of signals that are multiplexed by the WSM9,
including the passing through wavelengths of upstream and wavelengths input locally.
Figure 10-4 shows the networking of this application and describes unidirectional APE
only.

Figure 10-4 APE networking with WSM9 as the detection board

AM1 AM8 IN1


MCA4
EXPI /
OUT MCA8
WSM9
INn

Adjustment station Detection station

10.1.4 Configuration Principle


APE is optional and configured according to users’ requirement.
z To implement the APE function, make sure that the node at the transmit end is
configured with the adjusting board, and the node at the receive end should be
configured with the detecting board. DWDM systems are two-fiber bidirectional systems.
Therefore, one detection board and one adjustment board should be configured at the two
ends of an APE pair.
z The system adopts master slave control. The detecting node is the master node and
performs detecting, judging, calculating, and communicating. The adjusting node only
performs channel adjusting according to protocol frames. The user needs to configure at
the detecting node only. The user needs to appoint only the adjusting odd node (for
adjusting of the odd channels), the monitoring subrack at the receive end and at the
transmit end as null.
z To start the APE function, the adjusting board and one of optical interfaces of the MCA4
or MCA8 should be first configured as an APE function pair, and enable APE function.
z There is a dedicated APE protocol byte in the overhead frame of the supervisory signal,
which is used for transmitting APE related information.
z OADM stations may exist between an adjustment station and a detection station. Those
OADM stations usually have wavelengths added and dropped locally. In such as case,
the APE cannot equalize the optical power of the wavelengths added and dropped at the
OAMD station. Therefore, disable the monitoring flag of the wavelengths to be added
and dropped at the OAMD station.

10-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 10 Management of Optical Power

10.2 Automatic Level Control


The OptiX OSN 6800 system provides the automatic level control (ALC) function.

10.2.1 Function Description


In a DWDM system, optical fiber aging, optical connector aging or manual factors might lead
to abnormal attenuation of transmission lines. In case the attenuation on a line segment
increases, all input and output power will be reduced on all downstream amplifiers. The
system OSNR will get worse. At the same time, the received optical power will also be
reduced. Receiving performance will be greatly affected. The closer the attenuated segment is
to the transmission end, the more influence on OSNR there will be, as shown in Figure 10-5.
If ALC function is activated, this effect can be minimized. As the attenuation on a line
segment is increased, the input power on the amplifier will be reduced. But due to ALC, the
output power as well as the input and output powers of other downstream amplifiers will not
be changed. Hence there will be much less influence on OSNR. The optical power received
by the receiver will not be changed. Figure 10-6 shows the power changes on optical line
amplification regenerators in the ALC mode in case of abnormal attenuation on optical fiber
lines.

Figure 10-5 System power with ALC inactivated

High line losses

OAU1 OAU1 OAU1 OAU1

Normal output
Attenuated output
Attenuated input

Figure 10-6 System power with ALC activated

High line losses

OAU1 OAU1 OAU1 OAU1

Normal output
Normal input
Attenuated input

In normal working, two elements might cause the input power change in the optical amplifier:

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-5


OptiX OSN 6800
10 Management of Optical Power Product Description

z The addition/reduction of access channels (multiple channels might be added or dropped


at the same time)
In order not to affect the normal working of other channels, the system should quickly
respond to the change. The system works in the gain control mode.
z The abnormal attenuation in the physical media
ALC determine the adjustment of the variable optical attenuator according to the channel
amount and output power. The redundancy design of the system permits the abnormal
line attenuation adjustment. If the attenuation is within the limit, the adjustment process
takes several minutes. It ensures the normal working of the system.

10.2.2 Function Implementation


The ALC is realized in gain mode.

Prerequisite
The upstream node sends its output optical power value and the offset value between gain and
attenuation of the amplifier to its downstream every ten seconds. To receive the parameter
values sent from its upstream node, the downstream node will send queries to the upstream
node.

Realization
The ALC compares the line attenuation with the gain of the amplifier and gets the offset value.
The ALC adjusts the nominal gain of the optical amplifier board or Attenuation adjusting
board based on the attenuation value. The attenuation and gain of the OAU1 can be adjusted
to the same to ensure the power budget of the entire link.

Single-Site ALC Detection Flow


The procedure adopted to realize the ALC function at a station is shown as follows:
z The first node initiates queries regularly. After the ALC detection begins, an upstream
node sends its output optical power value (Pout1) and the offset value between gain and
attenuation (Poffset1) to its downstream every ten seconds. To receive the parameter values
sent from its upstream node, the downstream node will send queries to the upstream
node.
z The detection node queries the Pin2 and gain of itself.
z The node calculates the line attenuation. Figure 10-7 shows the relationship between two
nodes.
Line Attenuation = Pout1 – Pin2
í The node compares its gain with the line attenuation and count the difference
between the two as Poffset2. Poffset2 includes the amplifier gain offset that is caused by
line noise compensation.
í The node gets the accumulative offset by adding the Poffset1 of the upstream node and
the difference between its gain and the line attenuation after the adjustment of gain
compensation (Poffset2).
Paccumulate offset = Poffset2 + Poffset1
í The node judges whether the accumulative offset exceeds the pre-set threshold. If the
accumulative offset exceeds the pre-set threshold, the node then judges whether the
threshold has been exceeded for three times. If the threshold has been exceeded for

10-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 10 Management of Optical Power

less than three times, the node clears the Pout1 and Poffset1 of the upstream node saved
by it, queries the values of the upstream node once again, calculate the offset, and
make comparison. If the threshold has been exceeded for more than three times, the
node reports the anomaly. The first node initiates the adjustment.

Figure 10-7 Optical power relationship between two nodes

Node 1 Node 2
(Reference node) (Detection node)
Pout1 Pin2 Pout2

Line
Attenuation Gain

Upstream Dow nstream

Figure 10-8 shows the ALC abnormity checking flow of the gain adjustment.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-7


OptiX OSN 6800
10 Management of Optical Power Product Description

Figure 10-8 Flow chart of NE abnormity checking (gain mode)

Start

Initiate the detection.

Receive the Pout1 and


Poffset1 sent by the
adjacent upstream node.

Query the Pin2 and


gain of this node.

Query the Pout1 and


Calculate the loss of
Poffset1 of the
this node.
upstream node.

Compare the gain and


loss and adjust the gain
compensation.

Calculate the offset. Wait for the next


detection.

No
Does the offset
exceed the threshold?

Yes
Clear the Pout1 and No
Poffset1 of the upstream Has the threshold
node that are saved by been exceeded for more than
this node. three times?

Yes

Report the anomaly.

The first node initiates


the adjustment.

End

ALC Link Adjustment Flow


The ALC adjustment is divided into two flows: ALC pre-adjustment and ALC adjustment.
The system begins the ALC adjustment after the ALC pre-adjustment is completed.

10-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 10 Management of Optical Power

Figure 10-9 shows the following flow of ALC pre-adjustment.


z When one node in the link is abnormal, it sends an abnormity notice to the first node.
Then the first node sends a pre-adjustment command to the downstream nodes.
z Each node on the ALC link checks whether the MUT_LOS, R_LOS or BD_STATUS
alarm happens on the corresponding interface of the relative board. If no alarm exists, the
node turns into the wait-to-adjust state and sends the pre-adjustment command to its
downstream node. The system terminates the ALC adjustment of the node if any of the
previous three alarms exists.
z When the last node turns into the wait-to-adjust state, it sends the pre-adjustment ending
command to the first node. The ALC pre-adjustment is completed.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-9


OptiX OSN 6800
10 Management of Optical Power Product Description

Figure 10-9 Flow chart of ALC link pre-adjustment

Start

The first node


receives the
message of anomaly.

Is the link set to


be automaticall
adjusted?
No
Yes

Do not perform the


ALC adjustment.
Yes
Is the node the first
node ˛

No

Yes Yes
Does the node has Does the node has
alarms? alarms?
No No
The system
The node turns into The node turns into terminates the link
the waiting state. the waiting state. adjustment.

The system
terminates the link The node sends the
adjustment. No pre-adjustment
Is the node the last
node? command to the
downstream node.
Yes
The node sends the
pre-adjustment
ending message to
the first node.

End

Figure 10-10 shows the following flow of ALC link adjustment.


í After the first node receives the pre-adjustment ending command, the system
performs the ALC adjustment.
í Each node checks whether any alarm exists. If any alarm exists, the system
terminates the ALC adjustment and broadcasts the termination of ALC adjustment to
all the links.

10-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 10 Management of Optical Power

í If no alarm exists, check whether the node state is abnormal. If the node is normal,
check whether the node is the last node. If the node is not the last node, it sends the
adjustment command to its downstream node.
í If the node is abnormal, check whether the current node needs to be adjusted after
twice adjustments. If that is the case, the node reports the adjustment failure message
to the system and broadcasts the message to all the links.
í After the last node completes the adjustment, it sends the ALC adjustment ending
message.

Figure 10-10 Flow chart of ALC link adjustment

Start

The first node


receives the pre-
adjustment ending
event.

The first node reports


the link adjustment
starting event. Yes Does the node No The system does not
receive the adjustment perform the ALC
command? adjustment.

No Is the NR
Does the node state of the node
have alarms? abnormal?
Yes Yes
The system judges
The node reports the adjustment No
the state of each Does the current node need The node reports the
failure message and broadcasts the node for the second to be adjusted after twice
message to all the links. success of
time. adjustments?
adjustment.
Yes
The ALC The node reports the adjustment
adjustment is failure message and broadcasts
performed at this the message to all the links.
node.

The node terminates


the link adjustment.

NR The node sends the


Is the node the adjustment command
last node? to the downstream
node.
Yes
The node sends the link
adjustment ending
message to the first node.

End

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-11


OptiX OSN 6800
10 Management of Optical Power Product Description

Involved Boards and Ports


Boards of the following types are involved in realizing the ALC.
z Reference unit
The reference unit provides the output power of the node as reference for the
downstream node. (OAU1 and OBU1)
z Detection unit
The detection unit detects the output power to judge whether the link is normal. (OAU1
and OBU1)
z Attenuation adjusting board
The VA1 the VA4 are included. The attenuation adjusting board adjusts the line
attenuation.
z Supervisory channel board
The SC1 and the SC2 are included. The supervisory channel board provides supervisory
channel connection and the physical channel to transmit protocol frames.
z SCC board
The SCC functions as the executive board for the ALC function.

10.2.3 Networking of Application


To fulfill the ALC application, the ALC link must be created first. Take the ALC networking
as an example. See Figure 10-11.

Figure 10-11 Networking of ALC application


ALC Node 1 ALC Node 2 ALC Node 3 ALC Node 4 ALC Node 5

Link1
OTM OLA OLA OLA OTM

ALC Node 5 ALC Node 4 ALC Node 3 ALC Node 2 ALC Node 1

Link2

OTM OLA OLA OLA OTM

Creating ALC Link


It requires creating ALC link on the line to perform the adjustment of the ALC. The ALC link
includes the nodes that take part in the adjustment of the ALC. To determine the ALC link
direction, refer to Figure 10-11.
The user is responsible for the correctness of the NE ID. The NE software only performs
simple checking of the NE ID.
z NE IDs are parameters.
z The upstream ID should not be the same with the downstream ID.
z The upstream ID should not be the same with the local NE ID.
z The downstream ID should not be the same with the local NE ID.

10-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 10 Management of Optical Power

NOTE
As for the line that has the OADM stations, regard the transmit end and the receive end of the OADM as
two ALC links. The optical amplifier at the receive end of the OADM site is regarded as the last node in
the former ALC link. The optical amplifier at the transmit end of the OADM site is regarded as the first
node in the next ALC link.

10.2.4 Configuration Principle


z To implement the ALC function, configure the VA1 or VA4 on the adjusting site, and
configure the optical amplifier board on the reference site.
z It is allowed that the node without optical amplifiers serves as the pass-through node.
z The last node should not be configured to be the reference node. The first node should be
configured with a reference unit.
z At a non-reference node, the detection unit is required.
z When the detection board is OBU1, the attenuation adjustment unit is required.
z When you configure the first node, one board as a detection unit or that as a reference
unit should not be configured with the same optical port.
z Nodes that have wavelength adding and dropping are recommended to be configured as
reference nodes.

10.3 Intelligent Power Adjustment


The OptiX OSN 6800 system provides the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.

10.3.1 Function Description


In the DWDM system, optical fiber break, equipment failure or optical connector removal
may lead to the loss of optical signals including on the main optical channel and on the optical
auxiliary channels. To prevent exposed optical fibers hurting human body, especially eyes,
and to avoid surge of the optical amplifier, the system provides the IPA functions. Where the
loss of optical power signals happens on one or more optical trunk sections on the main
optical channel and the optical supervisory channels, the system can detect the loss of optical
signals on the link and instantly shut down the upstream optical amplifier.
Figure 10-12 shows how to achieve the IPA function. When there is a fiber break on the line,
the amplifier 3 and 1 are shut down. Then all the downstream optical amplifiers are shutdown
due to the feature of the amplifier. If the system adopts Raman amplifier(s), shut it down upon
any fiber break to lower the optical power of the entire system to a safe level because the
optical power of the reverse pump is high.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-13


OptiX OSN 6800
10 Management of Optical Power Product Description

Figure 10-12 Function description of the IPA

Site A Site B

1 2
fiber break
Optical Optical Optical 5DPDQ Optical
Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier $PSOLILHU Amplifier

3
4
Optical Optical Optical Optical
Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier

When the optical signals are restored to normal, the optical amplifier will work again. And the
amplifier 3 and 1 will be restarted.

NOTE
In the DWDM system, the IPA function is started only when optical signals of the active optical path are
lost. When this function is executed, only the lasers on the main path are shut down. No operation will
be implemented on the optical supervisory channel. Hence the functions of all optical supervisory
channels will not be affected.

10.3.2 Function Implementation


Fiber Break Detection
There are two methods used to detect the fiber break to achieve the IPA function.
z Detect the LOS of the optical amplifier board
z Detect the LOS of the Raman amplifier
z Detect the signals of the Auxiliary detection board (OSC/OTU)
Through a combination of the three methods, the fiber break can be judged more correctly.
Following is the logic of problem handling.
z If all the configured detection items meet the fiber break condition at the same time,
initiate the shut down process of the IPA.
z If one of the detection conditions recovers to normality, initiate the recovery process of
the IPA.
z In OSC restart mode, the IPA restoration starts only when the OSC detection is normal.

10-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 10 Management of Optical Power

z In a system with Raman amplifier(s), do not use the optical amplifier as the only detection
tool. The backward pump of the Raman amplifier has so much optical scattering power
that the downstream receive end still detects some noise input power even if there is
complete fiber break. This brings difficult to the judgment on optical fiber break.
Especially when there are limited signal channels, it is not possible to determine fiber
break only by the detection of the power of the optical amplifier.
z Enable the Raman board to detect alarms and set its LOS detection threshold so that the
Raman can perform assistant detection.

Involved Boards
Boards of the following types are involved in realizing the IPA.
z Detection board (optional)
The detection board detects whether the optical power received by each station is normal.
In an NE formed by master/slave subracks, it is suggested to configure the detection
board and the shutdown board in the master subrack. The OAU1 or OBU1 functions as
the detection board.
z Shutdown board (required)
The shutdown board only performs the shut-down function. The detection board and the
shutdown board cannot physically be the same board no matter if they are in the same
IPA pair or not. The OAU1 or OBU1 functions as the shutdown board.
z Raman amplifier (optional)
When the IPA is enabled, the Raman amplifier is off. The Raman amplifier can perform
assistant detection during the IPA fiber break judgment (CRPC).
z Auxiliary shutdown board (optional)
With the IPA enabled, shut down the pumping optical output of the board. This board has
only the shutdown function and is needed only when more than one Raman board needs
to be shut down. It is allowed to configure one Raman board (CRPC).
z Auxiliary detection board (optional)
These boards detect the service signals, which can be regarded as one condition of the
IPA fiber-break detection. The user can configure a maximum of four detection boards.
The alarms of boards are not directly reported. Instead, they are summarized according
to the logic relationship to be one of the criteria for IPA fiber break. Various OSC and
OTU boards function as the auxiliary detection board, which are Optional.

10.3.3 Configuration Principle


Configuration Description
z When the amplifiers are configured as detection board independently, IPA must only be
configured at the first site and the last site of the link. When there is a fiber break, the
amplifier at the first site and the last site of the link are shut down.
z To fulfill the IPA function and judge the fiber break more correctly, detection board and
auxiliary detection board must be configured at the same time. IPA must be configured at
every site. When there is a fiber break, the amplifier before and after the fiber break will
be shut down.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-15


OptiX OSN 6800
10 Management of Optical Power Product Description

z Ordinary optical amplifier sites need no OTU. If any auxiliary detection board is needed,
ensure that an OTU is configured in the network element (NE).
z To make sure the reliability of the detecting, the auxiliary board should avoid being
configured as detection board independently, for example, only OSC board is configured.

z When you configure the IPA, ensure that the communication between NEs is normal.
Otherwise, alarms may occur when you configure the inter-NE IPA. When the IPA is
enabled, the IPA ends abnormally if the communication between NEs is abnormal. The
IPA returns active after the communication returns normal.
z Versions of the NE software involved in the inter-NE communication should be the same.
This is to ensure that the communication between NEs is normal.

Suggestion on Setting
Suggestions about the setting of the IPA are as follows:
z For basic application, the user only needs to configure:
í One optical amplifier board as the detection board
í Another optical amplifier as the shutdown board (control executive board)
í Corresponding control parameters
z For application with a Raman amplifier board, add Raman shutdown board. Appoint the
NE ID and slot ID of the board in the configuration parameter.
z For complex application, add auxiliary detection board (service signal detection).
z After the configuration of one IPA pair, create other IPA pairs at the opposite end of the
line or at the other sites to complete the entire IPA process.

10-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Contents

11 Operation, Administration and Maintenance ..................................................................11-1


11.1 System Operation ...................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2 Administration and Maintenance............................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.1 Supervisory Board............................................................................................................................ 11-2
11.2.2 Alarm and Communication Unit ...................................................................................................... 11-3
11.2.3 Management of the OSC.................................................................................................................. 11-5
11.2.4 Network Management...................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.2.5 System Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 11-7
11.2.6 NE User Management .................................................................................................................... 11-10

Huawei Technologies ProprietaryHuawei


Issue 01 (2007-02-14) i
Technologies Proprietary
OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Figures

Figure 11-1 Signal flow of the OSC between three stations in chain networking ............................................ 11-5
Figure 11-2 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead ..................................................................... 11-6

Huawei Technologies ProprietaryHuawei


Issue 01 (2007-02-14) iii
Technologies Proprietary
OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Tables

Table 11-1 Description of the functional interfaces of the SCC in the OptiX OSN 6800 system..................... 11-3
Table 11-2 Interface function of EFI of the OptiX OSN 6800.......................................................................... 11-4
Table 11-3 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC................................................................... 11-6

Table 11-4 Definition of alarms for the OptiX OSN 6800 system.................................................................... 11-7
Table 11-5 Alarm classification on the T2000 for OptiX OSN 6800 system.................................................... 11-8

Huawei Technologies ProprietaryHuawei


Issue 01 (2007-02-14) v
Technologies Proprietary
OptiX OSN 6800 11 Operation, Administration and
Product Description Maintenance

11 Operation, Administration and


Maintenance

About This Chapter

The following table shows the contents of this chapter:

Section Describes

11.1 System Operation Technologies and methods to ensure normal system running.
11.2 Administration and Technologies and methods system management and
Maintenance maintenance.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-1


11 Operation, Administration and OptiX OSN 6800
Maintenance Product Description

11.1 System Operation


In order to improve the WDM system, the OptiX OSN 6800 system adopts various
technologies to control, adjust and manage the system. This is to ensure the normal and
effective running of the system.
z The OptiX OSN 6800 system provides the automatic power equilibrium (APE) function.
With this, the OptiX OSN 6800 can automatically adjust the launched optical power of
each channel. In this way, power equilibrium at the receive end is achieved and the
optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) is improved.
z The OptiX OSN 6800 system provides the automatic level control (ALC) function. This
keeps the optical signal at a normal level and prevents the input and output power of the
downstream optical amplifiers from declining. This improves the quality of the signals.
z The OptiX OSN 6800 system provides the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.
This protects the human body from the exposure to the laser emitted from any open
interface of fiber cracks.
z The OptiX OSN 6800 fully considers the demands for optical fiber management. Various
cabling channels and fiber storage units are available to facilitate the fiber management
in a cabinet and between cabinets.
z The OptiX OSN 6800 is designed with intelligent system for ambient temperature
monitoring, reporting and alarming. This ensures that the normal running of the system
is under a stable temperature.

11.2 Administration and Maintenance


The design of the cabinet and boards and the configuration of the OptiX OSN 6800 system
embody the requirements on easy and effective operation, administration and maintenance of
the equipment.

11.2.1 Supervisory Board


The system control and communication (SCC) board monitors and manages the OptiX OSN
6800 NE.

SCC Board
The SCC board collects the state information, alarm and performance parameters from the
functional modules of each board.
Then the SCC converts, processes and stores the information and parameters. At the same
time, it sends the control and administration information to the other functional modules.
The SCC provides functional interfaces to facilitate the communication between the
functional modules of each board and the NM, as shown in Table 11-1.

11-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800 11 Operation, Administration and
Product Description Maintenance

Table 11-1 Description of the functional interfaces of the SCC in the OptiX OSN 6800 system
Functional Description
Interface

F&fa Connect the RS-232 interface to a PC or a workstation for


commissioning.
Etherneta TMN interface, local NE management interface, and internal
communication interface, used for commissioning
OAMa The operation, administration and maintenance interface
The X.25 interface is provided to communicate with the terminal
through the public packet switched network.
DCC communication Provides the data communication channel (DCC) of the
supervisory link.
Communication Communicates with other boards in the subrack, collects
module performance data, and delivers the configuration.
Qx Network management communication interface
a: The interface functions of the SCC have corresponding external physical interfaces in the subrack interface
area and on the AUX. For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Hardware Description.

The SCC monitors the running status of the boards in the OptiX OSN 6800 NE.
The main monitoring parameters include:
z Input optical power
z Output optical power
z Laser temperature
z B1 performance parameter
z FEC performance parameter

11.2.2 Alarm and Communication Unit


The EFI board implements functions such as alarm input, alarm output and alarm cascading.
The EFI provides various functional interfaces such as management interfaces, inter-subrack
communication interfaces, cascading interfaces and alarm input/output interfaces. The EFI is
located behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. On the front panel, there
are four subrack status indicators and ten RJ-45 interfaces. Table 11-2 shows the interface
functions of the EFI.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-3


11 Operation, Administration and OptiX OSN 6800
Maintenance Product Description

Table 11-2 Interface function of EFI of the OptiX OSN 6800


Front Panel Panel Interface Usage
Appearance Interface Type

COM RJ-45 It is the commissioning network interface for


communication between the EFI and the AUX
ETH3 RJ-45 It is for inter-subrack communication in the subrack.
ALMP2

ALMO1 RJ-45 Alarm outputs are usually sent to the distribution cabinet
through output interfaces and cascading interfaces. They
LAMP1

ALMO2
can also be configured to be output through the other
ALMO3
ALMI2

interfaces for centralized display. The OptiX OSN 6800


ALMO4 provides eight alarm output. The first three are critical
ALMI1

alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm by default. The


other five are reserved. Alarm outputs can be
SERIAL

concatenated.
SERIAL DB9 The OAM interface functions as a serial NM interface. It
supports X.25 protocol. When the interface is COA
management serial interface, it can manage external
equipment such as COA, TDA, and DCU. The serial
port rate is 9.6kbit/s.
ALMI1 RJ45 The external alarm input function is designed because
ALMI2 the alarms of external equipment (such as environment
monitoring system) need to be monitored remotely. The
ALM04

names of the eight alarms are configurable to realize


ALM03

remote monitoring of external alarms together with


external equipment.
ALM02

LAMP1 RJ45 This is used to realize concatenation of inter-subrack


ALM01

LAMP2 alarms and to output alarm driving signals to the cabinet


indicator.
ETH3
COM

Functions of EFI board


The functions of EFI board are listed as follows.
z Protects the circuits and parts of the equipment against over-current or surge voltage
caused by factors such as lightening strike.
z Inputs eight external alarms to realize remote monitoring of external alarms.
z Outputs eight external alarms to the alarm distribution cabinet or the centralized alarm
control equipment.
z Monitors the voltage of the two input powers of the subrack. Reports over-voltage
alarms, under-voltage alarms and the detected voltage to the SCC.
z Instructed by the SCC, drives the cabinet indicators and the four subrack status indicators
on the front panels. Provides interfaces for alarm cascading.

11-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800 11 Operation, Administration and
Product Description Maintenance

z Supports querying the board manufacture information.

11.2.3 Management of the OSC


Functions of the OSC
The optical supervisory channel (OSC) serves to transmit the monitoring and management
information among the stations in the OptiX OSN 6800 system. The channel of the OSC is at
1510 nm.
The OSC boards include the SC1 and the SC2.
The OSC adopts CMI coding. Before the coding, the signal rate is 2 Mbit/s. After the coding,
the signal rate is 4 Mbit/s.

Working of the OSC


Figure 11-1 shows the signal flow of the OSC between three stations. The signals of the OSC
and the service signals are independent from each other. The supervisory signals are not
amplified. They are terminated and regenerated in a station.
Here is an example to explain the communication process of the OSC. The communication
between the optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) and the optical line amplifier (OLA) is taken
as the example.

Figure 11-1 Signal flow of the OSC between three stations in chain networking

O
O
T OM OA OA OA OD T
U U
F F F F
SC1 I I I I
U SC2 SC1
U U U
O
O
T OD OA OA OM
OA T
U
U

OTM1 OLA OTM2

In the eastward direction, the SC1 in OTM1 receives the overhead data frames from the SCC.
Then the optical transmit module performs E/O conversion to the frames before the
supervisory data frames is modulated to the OSC wavelength (1510 nm). The multiplexer of
the FIU multiplexes the wavelength of the OSC with the service signals and sends them to the
optical regeneration station OLA.
The demultiplexer of the FIU in the OLA station demultiplexes the signals into service signals
and OSC signals. The service signals are transmitted to the east after they are regenerated and
amplified by the OAU.
The west optical receive module of the SC2 in the OLA performs O/E conversion to the OSC
signals. The supervisory data frames are recovered and processed before they are sent to the
SCC for data exchange. The processed supervisory signals and the service signals are
multiplexed by the FIU and sent to the line for transmission.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-5


11 Operation, Administration and OptiX OSN 6800
Maintenance Product Description

The demultiplexer of the FIU in the OTM2 station demultiplexes the signals into service
signals and OSC signals. The west optical receive module of the SC1 performs O/E
conversion to the OSC signals. The supervisory data frames are recovered and processed
before they are sent to the SCC for data exchange.

Frame Structure of the OSC Signals


Figure 11-2 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32
timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31.

Figure 11-2 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead

0 1 2 3 ... 14 15 16 ... 31

For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table
11-3.

Table 11-3 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC

Timeslot Name Function


Number

0 Frame alignment signal Locates the starting point of each E1 frame.


1 E1 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one
orderwire phone requires three bytes.
2 F1 byte Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface
E1 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one
orderwire phone requires three bytes.
3–13, 15 D1–D12 bytes DCC channel
Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the issued
commands and the data of the queried alarms and
performances.
The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the
SCC for processing.
14 ALC byte Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol
byte.
E1 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one
orderwire phone requires three bytes.
17 F2 byte Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the
temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of
specific maintenance.
E2 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one
orderwire phone requires three bytes.

11-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800 11 Operation, Administration and
Product Description Maintenance

Timeslot Name Function


Number

18 F3 byte Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the
temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of
specific maintenance.
E2 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one
orderwire phone requires three bytes.
19 E2 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone.
Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes.
20 APE byte Provides the channel for the transmission of APE protocol
byte.
Other Reserved -

11.2.4 Network Management


Any NM tool in compliance with the ITU-T Recommendations can be used to manage the
OptiX OSN 6800. Through the connection between the NM tool and the SCC of the NE, the
user can:
z Perform a centralized management of multiple systems at a station.
z Monitor the state of the equipment and the network by fault reports and alarm
monitoring.
z Configure and make plans for multiple NEs.

11.2.5 System Maintenance


System Alarm Function
The OptiX OSN 6800 system supports the alarm management function. This enables the set
and query of alarm level, automatic report of alarms, and clearance of history alarms. These
help the user to simplify the monitor and maintain the system in real time.
z Definition on Alarm Levels
Alarm levels are used to identify the severity and importance of an alarm.
Alarms are classified into four categories in terms of severity: critical alarms, major alarms,
minor alarms, and warnings.
For the handling of alarms of different levels, refer to Table 11-4.

Table 11-4 Definition of alarms for the OptiX OSN 6800 system
Level Definition Handling

Critical Refers to the alarm or performance event that affects the whole This alarm needs urgent
alarm NE and will lead to the paralysis of the SCC. handling. Otherwise, there will
be a risk of system paralysis.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-7


11 Operation, Administration and OptiX OSN 6800
Maintenance Product Description

Level Definition Handling

Major Refers to the alarm or performance event of the board or line. It needs timely handling;
alarm otherwise, key functions will be
affected.
Minor Refers to the general alarm or performance event that indicates It is to remind you to find out
alarm whether the board or line works normally, such as the board the alarm causes in time so as
resetting, failure of application for or utilization overtime of to clear the incipient faults.
public resources.
Warning Refers to the prompt alarm or performance event, such as the It does not need to be handled.
switching alarm. It only requires knowing the
running status of the switch.

z Alarm Classification on the T2000


On the T2000, there are six types of alarms, as shown in Table 11-5.

Table 11-5 Alarm classification on the T2000 for OptiX OSN 6800 system

Alarm Definition Example

Communication alarm Alarm related to NE communication, ECC The NE communication is


communication, optical signal communication interrupted.
Optical signals are lost.
Process alarm Alarm related to software process and The bus of the equipment conflicts.
abnormal function. The check of the protection path
fails.
Equipment alarm Alarm related to Equipment hardware. The laser fails.
There is a loopback at the optical
port.
Service alarm Alarm related to service and QoS. The performance of the multiplex
section exceeds the threshold.
Excessive B1 bit errors.
Environment alarm Alarm related to the power system and The temperature of the power
equipment room environment (such as module is too high.
temperature, humidity and access control)
Security alarm Alarm related to the security of T2000 and The NE user has not logged in.
NEs.

z Current Alarm
Current alarms refer to:
í The alarms that have not been cleared or confirmed.
í The performance events and alarms that have been reported to the alarm box but have
not been confirmed by the user.

11-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800 11 Operation, Administration and
Product Description Maintenance

z Alarm Log
It records all the alarms that have happened, including the alarms that have been cleared or
not and all the performance events.

System Performance Monitoring Function


Performance event is a key parameter that reflects the working performance of the OptiX
OSN 6800.
The knowledge of the causes that lead to the performance events, the relevant boards and
boards is helpful to find out the incipient faults in routine maintenance and analyze the faults
in case they happen.
The performance events are related with the alarms. If the performance event value exceeds
the pre-set threshold value, relevant alarm will be generated. Thus, when a performance event
happens, check whether the relevant alarm appears. Take the handling method of the alarm as
a reference to handle the performance event.
OptiX OSN 6800 system provides the following system performance monitoring functions:
z Set/Query the starting time of performance monitoring
z Set/Query the end time of performance monitoring
z Set/Query performance monitoring status
z Set/Query the pause status of performance monitoring
z Set/Query the automatic and regular report of performance data
z Set/Query the performance threshold allowed status
z Set/Query the performance threshold value
z Query the current/history performance data
z Clear the current/history performance data
z Query the EID information of performance

System Monitoring Items


The OptiX OSN 6800 system provides the following system monitoring information.
z Temperature of the running board
z In-position status of the physical board
z Management function of the boards in different functional units
z Management function of the fan module
z Management function of the power module
z Input/Output optical power of the OTU
z Input/Output optical power of the OAU
z Current of the laser in the amplifier
z Temperature of the laser in the amplifier
z Temperature of the transmitting laser

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-9


11 Operation, Administration and OptiX OSN 6800
Maintenance Product Description

11.2.6 NE User Management


The OptiX OSN 6800 supports the security management to the NE user that has logged in to
the NE. The management covers:
z Creation and authority assignment of an NE user
z Change of an NE user password
z Query of NE security parameters, including the user expiration date and password
change time
z Management to all NE users through the T2000, including the display of users, the
change of passwords and the setting of security log query authority
NOTE
When there is only one user with the authority of administrator on the NE, the user cannot be deleted,
and the authority level and valid period of the user cannot be changed.

When there is only one user with the authority of administrator on the NE, the password of
the user can be changed. Keep the user account and password safe. Without the password or
user account, the operations corresponding to the authority level cannot be performed. The
initialization of the password can only be realized by replacing the SCC board

11-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Contents

12 Technical Specifications .......................................................................................................12-1


12.1 General Specifications...............................................................................................................................12-3
12.1.1 Cabinet Specifications......................................................................................................................12-3
12.1.2 Subrack Specifications.....................................................................................................................12-3
12.1.3 DCM Frame Specifications..............................................................................................................12-4
12.1.4 Fiber-spooling Frame Specifications ...............................................................................................12-4
12.2 Wavelength and Frequency of Optical Channels.......................................................................................12-4
12.2.1 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of DWDM System....................................................12-4
12.2.2 Nominal Central Wavelengths of CWDM System...........................................................................12-6
12.3 Optical Transponder Unit Specifications...................................................................................................12-6
12.3.1 LSX Board Specifications................................................................................................................12-6
12.3.2 LSXR Board Specifications .............................................................................................................12-9
12.3.3 L4G Board Specifications..............................................................................................................12-10
12.3.4 LDGD Board Specifications ..........................................................................................................12-12
12.3.5 LDGS Board Specifications...........................................................................................................12-15
12.3.6 LQMD Board Specifications .........................................................................................................12-17
12.3.7 LQMS Board Specifications ..........................................................................................................12-21
12.3.8 LWXD Board Specifications..........................................................................................................12-25
12.3.9 LWXS Board Specifications ..........................................................................................................12-29
12.3.10 LWX2 Board Specifications ........................................................................................................12-33
12.4 Tributary Unit Specifications ..................................................................................................................12-37
12.4.1 TQM Board Specifications ............................................................................................................12-37
12.4.2 TDG Board Specifications .............................................................................................................12-40
12.4.3 TQS Board Specifications..............................................................................................................12-40
12.5 Line Unit Specifications..........................................................................................................................12-42
12.5.1 NS2 Board Specifications ..............................................................................................................12-42
12.6 Optical Multiplexer Unit and Demultiplexer Unit Specifications ...........................................................12-43
12.6.1 M40 Board Specifications..............................................................................................................12-43
12.6.2 MV40 Board Specifications...........................................................................................................12-43
12.6.3 D40 Board Specifications ..............................................................................................................12-44
12.6.4 D40V Board Specifications............................................................................................................12-44
12.6.5 FIU Board Specifications...............................................................................................................12-45

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Contents Product Description

12.7 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer Unit Specifications ..........................................................................12-45


12.7.1 MR2 Board Specifications .............................................................................................................12-45
12.7.2 MR4 Board Specifications .............................................................................................................12-46
12.7.3 MR8 Board Specifications .............................................................................................................12-46
12.7.4 CMR2 Board Specifications ..........................................................................................................12-47
12.7.5 CMR4 Board Specifications ..........................................................................................................12-48
12.8 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit Specifications...............................................12-48
12.8.1 ROAM Board Specifications .........................................................................................................12-48
12.8.2 WSM9 Board Specifications..........................................................................................................12-49
12.8.3 WSD9 Board Specifications ..........................................................................................................12-49
12.8.4 RMU9 Board Specifications ..........................................................................................................12-50
12.9 Optical Amplifier Unit Specifications .....................................................................................................12-50
12.9.1 OAU1 Board Specifications...........................................................................................................12-50
12.9.2 OBU1 Board Specifications...........................................................................................................12-51
12.9.3 CRPC Board Specifications ...........................................................................................................12-52
12.10 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit Specifications .................................................................................12-52
12.10.1 SC1 Board Specifications ............................................................................................................12-52
12.10.2 SC2 Board Specifications ............................................................................................................12-53
12.11 Optical Protection Unit Specifications ..................................................................................................12-53
12.11.1 OLP Board Specifications ............................................................................................................12-53
12.11.2 SCS Board Specifications ............................................................................................................12-53
12.11.3 DCP Board Specifications............................................................................................................12-54
12.12 Spectrum Analyzer Unit Specifications.................................................................................................12-54
12.12.1 MCA4 Board Specifications ........................................................................................................12-54
12.12.2 MCA8 Board Specifications ........................................................................................................12-55
12.13 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit Specifications ...................................................................................12-55
12.13.1 VA1 Board Specifications ............................................................................................................12-55
12.13.2 VA4 Board Specifications ............................................................................................................12-55
12.14 DCM Specifications ..............................................................................................................................12-56

ii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Tables

Table 12-1 Cabinet specifications.....................................................................................................................12-3


Table 12-2 Subrack specifications ....................................................................................................................12-3
Table 12-3 DCM frame specifications..............................................................................................................12-4

Table 12-4 Fiber-spooling frame specifications................................................................................................12-4


Table 12-5 Nominal central wavelength and frequency of DWDM system .....................................................12-4
Table 12-6 Nominal central wavelengths of CWDM system ...........................................................................12-6

Table 12-7 Specifications of optical module at the client side of the LSX .......................................................12-7
Table 12-8 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LSX.........................................................12-8
Table 12-9 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LSXR ......................................................12-9

Table 12-10 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the L4G.............................................12-10
Table 12-11 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the L4G ..................................................... 12-11
Table 12-12 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LDGD .........................................12-12

Table 12-13 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LDGD .................................................12-13
Table 12-14 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LDGD .................................................12-14
Table 12-15 GE Specifications of optical module at the client side of the LDGS..........................................12-15

Table 12-16 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LDGS..................................................12-16


Table 12-17 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LDGS ..................................................12-17
Table 12-18 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the LQMD......................................12-18

Table 12-19 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LQMD ........................................12-19
Table 12-20 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LQMD ................................................12-20
Table 12-21 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LQMD.................................................12-21

Table 12-22 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the LQMS.......................................12-22
Table 12-23 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LQMS .........................................12-23
Table 12-24 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LQMS .................................................12-24

Table 12-25 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LQMS .................................................12-25
Table 12-26 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the LWXD ......................................12-26

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 6800
Tables Product Description

Table 12-27 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LWXD.........................................12-27

Table 12-28 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LWXD.................................................12-28


Table 12-29 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LWXD.................................................12-29
Table 12-30 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the LWXS.......................................12-30

Table 12-31 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LWXS .........................................12-31
Table 12-32 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LWXS .................................................12-32
Table 12-33 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LWXS .................................................12-33

Table 12-34 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the LWX2.......................................12-34
Table 12-35 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LWX2 .........................................12-35
Table 12-36 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LWX2 .................................................12-36

Table 12-37 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LWX2..................................................12-37


Table 12-38 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the TQM.........................................12-38
Table 12-39 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the TQM ...........................................12-39

Table 12-40 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the TDG ............................................12-40
Table 12-41 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the TQS ..........................................12-41
Table 12-42 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the NS2 .....................................................12-42

Table 12-43 M40 board specifications............................................................................................................12-43


Table 12-44 MV40 board specifications.........................................................................................................12-43
Table 12-45 D40 board specifications ............................................................................................................12-44

Table 12-46 D40V board specifications .........................................................................................................12-44


Table 12-47 FIU board specifications.............................................................................................................12-45
Table 12-48 MR2 board specifications ...........................................................................................................12-45
Table 12-49 MR4 board specifications ...........................................................................................................12-46
Table 12-50 MR8 board specifications ...........................................................................................................12-46
Table 12-51 CMR2 board specifications ........................................................................................................12-47
Table 12-52 CMR4 board specifications ........................................................................................................12-48
Table 12-53 ROAM board specifications .......................................................................................................12-48
Table 12-54 WSM9 board specifications........................................................................................................12-49
Table 12-55 WSD9 board specifications ........................................................................................................12-49
Table 12-56 RMU9 board specifications ........................................................................................................12-50
Table 12-57 OAU1board specifications..........................................................................................................12-50

Table 12-58 OBU1 board specifications.........................................................................................................12-51


Table 12-59 CRPC board specifications .........................................................................................................12-52

iv Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Tables

Table 12-60 SC1 board specifications ............................................................................................................12-52

Table 12-61 SC2 board specifications ............................................................................................................12-53


Table 12-62 OLP board specifications............................................................................................................12-53
Table 12-63 SCS board specifications ............................................................................................................12-53

Table 12-64 DCP board specifications............................................................................................................12-54


Table 12-65 MCA4 board specifications ........................................................................................................12-54
Table 12-66 MCA8 board specifications ........................................................................................................12-55

Table 12-67 VA1 board specifications ............................................................................................................12-55


Table 12-68 VA4 board specifications ............................................................................................................12-55
Table 12-69 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of L-band (G.652 fiber) ....12-56

Table 12-70 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (G.655 LEAF fiber)
.........................................................................................................................................................................12-56

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary v


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

12 Technical Specifications

About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

Section Describes

12.1 General Specifications General specifications for the OptiX OSN 6800, including the
cabinet, the subrack, DCM frame and fiber-spooling frame
specifications.
12.2 Wavelength and Frequency of Nominal central wavelengths details of DWDM system and CWDM
Optical Channels system, as well as the frequency of DWDM system.
12.3 Optical Transponder Unit Specifications for the optical transponder unit.
Specifications
12.4 Tributary Unit Specifications Specifications for the tributary unit.
12.5 Line Unit Specifications Specifications for the line unit.
12.6 Optical Multiplexer Unit and Specifications for the optical multiplexer unit and optical
Demultiplexer Unit Specifications demultiplexer unit.
12.7 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer Specifications for the reconfigurable optical add and drop
Unit Specifications multiplexing unit.
12.8 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Specifications for the optical add and drop multiplexer unit.
Drop Multiplexing Unit Specifications
12.9 Optical Amplifier Unit Specifications for the optical amplifier unit.
Specifications
12.10 Optical Supervisory Channel Specifications for the optical supervisory channel unit specifications.
Unit Specifications
12.11 Optical Protection Unit Specifications for the optical protection unit.
Specifications
12.12 Spectrum Analyzer Unit Specifications for the variable optical attenuator unit.
Specifications

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-1


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Section Describes

12.13 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit Specifications for the spectrum analyzer unit.
Specifications
12.14 DCM Specifications Specifications for the DCM module.

12-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

12.1 General Specifications


12.1.1 Cabinet Specifications
Table 12-1 Cabinet specifications

Item 2.2 m Cabinet Specifications 2.6 m Cabinet Specifications

Dimensions 2200 mm (H) x 600 mm (W) x 2600 mm (H) x 600 mm (W) x 300
300 mm (D) mm (D)
Weight 69 kg 80 kg
Maximum 3400 W 3400 W
power
consumption
Power supply –48 V DC/–60 V DC –48 V DC/–60 V DC
Working –38.4 V DC to –72 V DC –38.4 V DC to –72 V DC
voltage range

12.1.2 Subrack Specifications


Table 12-2 Subrack specifications

Item Specifications

Dimensions 400 mm (H) x 487 mm (W) x 295 mm (D)


Weight of an empty subrack 13 kg
(with backplane)
Weight of a fully configured 40 kg
subrack
Maximum power consumption 850 W
(full configuration)
Rated current 30 A
Power supply –48 V DC/–60 V DC
Working voltage range –38.4 V DC to –72 V DC

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-3


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

12.1.3 DCM Frame Specifications


Table 12-3 DCM frame specifications

Item Specification

Dimensions 48.4 mm (H) x 484.0 mm (W) x 281.0 mm (D)


Weight 3.5 kg
Note: H = Height, W = Width, D = Depth

12.1.4 Fiber-spooling Frame Specifications


Table 12-4 Fiber-spooling frame specifications

Item Specification

Dimensions 46.4 mm (H) x 436.0 mm (W) x 284.0 mm (D)


Weight 5.0 kg
Note: H = Height, W = Width, D = Depth

12.2 Wavelength and Frequency of Optical Channels


12.2.1 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of DWDM
System

The OptiX OSN 6800 supports 40 odd wavelengths in C band.

Table 12-5 Nominal central wavelength and frequency of DWDM system

Central Central Central Central


Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)

196.05 1529.16 194.05 1544.92


196.00 1529.55 194.00 1545.32
195.95 1529.94 193.95 1545.72
195.90 1530.33 193.90 1546.12
195.85 1530.72 193.85 1546.52
195.80 1531.12 193.80 1546.92
195.75 1531.51 193.75 1547.32

12-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Central Central Central Central


Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)

195.70 1531.90 193.70 1547.72


195.65 1532.29 193.65 1548.11
195.60 1532.68 193.60 1548.51
195.55 1533.07 193.55 1548.91
195.50 1533.47 193.50 1549.32
195.45 1533.86 193.45 1549.72
195.40 1534.25 193.40 1550.12
195.35 1534.64 193.35 1550.52
195.30 1535.04 193.30 1550.92
195.25 1535.43 193.25 1551.32
195.20 1535.82 193.20 1551.72
195.15 1536.22 193.15 1552.12
195.10 1536.61 193.10 1552.52
195.05 1537.00 193.05 1552.93
195.00 1537.40 193.00 1553.33
194.95 1537.79 192.95 1553.73
194.90 1538.19 192.90 1554.13
194.85 1538.58 192.85 1554.54
194.80 1538.98 192.80 1554.94
194.75 1539.37 192.75 1555.34
194.70 1539.77 192.70 1555.75
194.65 1540.16 192.65 1556.15
194.60 1540.56 192.60 1556.55
194.55 1540.95 192.55 1556.96
194.50 1541.35 192.50 1557.36
194.45 1541.75 192.45 1557.77
194.40 1542.14 192.40 1558.17
194.35 1542.54 192.35 1558.58
194.30 1542.94 192.30 1558.98
194.25 1543.33 192.25 1559.39

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-5


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Central Central Central Central


Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)

194.20 1543.73 192.20 1559.79


194.15 1544.13 192.15 1560.20
194.10 1544.53 192.10 1560.61

12.2.2 Nominal Central Wavelengths of CWDM System


Table 12-6 Nominal central wavelengths of CWDM system
Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm)

1611 1431
1591 1411
1571 1391
1551 1371
1531 1351
1511 1331
1491 1311
1471 1291
1451 1271

12.3 Optical Transponder Unit Specifications


12.3.1 LSX Board Specifications
Optical Module at the Client Side

z 10 Gbit/s multi-rate-10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multi-rate-40 km module and 10 Gbit/s multi-rate-80


km module can be used to access OC192, STM-64, 10GE, and OTU2 signals. The specifications
listed following completely apply to OTU2 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from
these specifications when the accessed signals are OC192, STM-64, or 10GE signals.
z 10 Gbit/s single-rate-0.3 km module supports 10GE service. The specifications listed following
completely apply to 10GE service.

12-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Table 12-7 Specifications of optical module at the client side of the LSX
Item Unit Value

Optical Module 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s


Type Multi-rate Multi-rate -40 Single-rate -0.3 Multi-rate
-10 km km km -80 km

Code rate Gbit/s 9.95 to 10.7 9.95 to 10.7 10.3 9.95 to 10.7
Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source type – SLM SLM MLM SLM
Target distance km 10 40 0.3 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 840 to 860 1530 to 1565
range
Maximum mean dBm –1 2 –1.3 4
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –6 –1 –7.3 0
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 6 8.2 3 9
ratio
Maximum –20 dB nm NA NA NA NA
spectral width
Minimum side mode dB 30 30 30 30
suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask – G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating wavelength nm 1270 to 1600 1270 to 1600 1270 to 1600 1270 to 1600
range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –13.4 –15 –7.5 –24.0
Minimum receiver dBm 0.5 –1 –1 –7
overload
Maximum reflectance dB NA NA NA NA

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-7


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Optical Module at DWDM Side

Table 12-8 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LSX

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 800 1600 1200 1200 4800


ps/nm ps/nm ps/nm-tun ps/nm-tun ps/nm
able-PIN able-APD -tunable

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ- NRZ- ODB-


tunable tunable tunable
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0 4 4 4 4
Minimum mean launched power dBm –5 0 0 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10 10 10 NA
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz r10
Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode suppression dB 35 35 35 35 35
ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800 1600 1200 1200 4800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN APD PIN APD APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm –14 –25 –16 –25 –27
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0 –9 0 –9 –8
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27 –27 –27

12-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

12.3.2 LSXR Board Specifications


Optical Module at DWDM Side

Table 12-9 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LSXR

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 800 1600 1200 1200 4800


ps/nm ps/nm ps/nm-tunable ps/nm-tunable ps/nm-
-PIN -APD tunable

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ- NRZ- ODB-


tunable tunable tunable
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0 4 4 4 4
Minimum mean launched power dBm –5 0 0 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10 10 10 NA
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz r10
Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode suppression dB 35 35 35 35 35
ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/n 800 1600 1200 1200 4800
m
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN APD PIN APD APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm –14 –25 –16 –25 –27
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0 –9 0 –9 –8
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27 –27 –27

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-9


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

12.3.3 L4G Board Specifications


GE Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 12-10 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the L4G

Item Unit Value

Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s 1000 1000 1000


Type Multi-rate BASE-LX-10 BASE-LX-40 BASE-ZX-80
km km km

Line code format – 8B/10B 8B/10B 8B/10B 8B/10B


Target distance km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm –2.5 –3 3 5
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –9.5 –11.5 –2 –2
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 9 9 9 9
ratio
Eye pattern mask – IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –17 –19 –21 –21
Minimum receiver dBm 0 –3 –3 –3
overload

12-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Optical Module at DWDM Side

Table 12-11 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the L4G

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 3400 ps/nm 6400 ps/nm 3400 ps/nm -


tunable

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 2 –1 4
Minimum mean launched power dBm –2 –5 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10 10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz r10
Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode suppression dB 35 35 35
ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 3400 6400 3400
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – APD APD APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm –25 –25 –25
Minimum receiver overload dBm –9 –9 –9
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-11


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

12.3.4 LDGD Board Specifications


GE Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 12-12 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LDGD

Item Unit Value

Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s 1000 1000 1000


Type Multi-rate BASE-LX-10 BASE-LX-40 BASE-ZX-80
km km km

Line code format – 8B/10B 8B/10B 8B/10B 8B/10B


Target distance km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm –2.5 –3 3 5
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –9.5 –11.5 –2 –2
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 9 9 9 9
ratio
Eye pattern mask – IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –17 –19 –21 –21
Minimum receiver dBm 0 –3 –3 –3
overload

12-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Optical Module at DWDM Side

Table 12-13 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LDGD

Item Uni Value


t
Optical Module Type 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800
ps/nm- ps/nm- ps/nm-PIN ps/nm-2mW- ps/nm-tunable
PINa APDa APD

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean dBm –4 –4 0 0 0
launched power
Minimum mean launched dBm –8 –8 –5 –5 –4
power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency GHz r10
deviation
Maximum –20 dB nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2
spectral width
Minimum side mode dB 35 35 30 30 35
suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/n 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800
m
Eye pattern mask – G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN APD PIN APD APD
Operating wavelength nm 1200 to 1650
range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –25 –18 –25 –30
Minimum receiver dBm 0 –9 0 –9 –9
overload
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27 –27 –27
a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and the 12800 ps/nm-APD that are fixed-wavelength optical modules do not support point access mode.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-13


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Optical Module at CWDM Side

Table 12-14 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LDGD

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW

Line code format – NRZ


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 2
Minimum mean launched power dBm –0.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation nm d r6.5
Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 1
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1600
Eye pattern mask – Compliant with G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm –28
Minimum receiver overload dBm –9
Maximum reflectance dB –27

12-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

12.3.5 LDGS Board Specifications


GE Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 12-15 GE Specifications of optical module at the client side of the LDGS

Item Unit Value

Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s 1000 1000 1000


Type Multi-rate BASE-LX-10 BASE-LX-40 BASE-ZX-80
km km km

Line code format – 8B/10B 8B/10B 8B/10B 8B/10B


Target distance km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm –2.5 –3 3 5
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –9.5 –11.5 –2 –2
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 9 9 9 9
ratio
Eye pattern mask – IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –17 –19 –21 –21
Minimum receiver dBm 0 –3 –3 –3
overload

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-15


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Optical Module at DWDM Side

Table 12-16 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LDGS

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800


ps/nm- ps/nm ps/nm-PIN ps/nm-2mW- ps/nm-tunable
PINa -APDa APD

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean dBm –1 –1 3 3 3
launched power
Minimum mean launched dBm –5 –5 –2 –2 –1
power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency GHz r10
deviation
Maximum –20 dB nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2
spectral width
Minimum side mode dB 35 35 30 30 35
suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/n 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800
m
Eye pattern mask – G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN APD PIN APD APD
Operating wavelength nm 1200 to 1650
range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –25 –18 –25 –30
Minimum receiver dBm 0 –9 0 –9 –9
overload
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27 –27 –27
a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and the 12800 ps/nm-APD that are fixed-wavelength optical modules do not support point access mode.

12-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Optical Module at CWDM Side

Table 12-17 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LDGS

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW

Line code format – NRZ


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 5
Minimum mean launched power dBm 2.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation nm d r6.5
Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 1
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1600
Eye pattern mask – Compliant with G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm –28
Minimum receiver overload dBm –9
Maximum reflectance dB –27

12.3.6 LQMD Board Specifications


SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above
completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI,
or FE signals.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-17


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Table 12-18 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the LQMD
Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ


Optical source type – MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target distance km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range
Maximum mean dBm –3 0 3 3
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –10 –5 –2 –2
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
ratio
Maximum –20 dB nm NA 1 1 1
spectral width
Minimum side mode dB NA 30 30 30
suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask – G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN PIN APD APD
Operating wavelength nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –18 –27 –28
Minimum receiver dBm –3 0 –9 –9
overload
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27 –27

GE Optical Module at the Client Side

2.125 Gbit/s multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The
specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly
different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.

12-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can
be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Table 12-19 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LQMD

Item Unit Value

Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s 1000 1000 1000


Type multi-rate BASE-LX-10 BASE-LX-40 BASE-ZX-80
km km km

Line code format – 8B/10B 8B/10B 8B/10B 8B/10B


Target distance km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm –2.5 –3 3 5
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –9.5 –11.5 –2 –2
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 9 9 9 9
ratio
Eye pattern mask – IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –17 –19 –21 –21
Minimum receiver dBm 0 –3 –3 –3
overload

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-19


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Optical Module at DWDM Side

Table 12-20 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LQMD

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800


ps/nm- ps/nm-APDa ps/nm ps/nm-2mW ps/nm-
PINa -PIN -APD tunable

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched dBm –4 –4 0 0 0
power
Minimum mean launched dBm –8 –8 –5 –5 –4
power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency GHz r10
deviation
Maximum –20 dB spectral nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2
width
Minimum side mode dB 35 35 30 30 35
suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800
Eye pattern mask – G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN APD PIN APD APD
Operating wavelength nm 1200 to 1650
range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –25 –18 –25 –30
Minimum receiver dBm 0 –9 0 –9 –9
overload
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27 –27 –27
a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and the 12800 ps/nm-APD that are fixed-wavelength optical modules do not support point access mode.

12-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Optical Module at CWDM Side

Table 12-21 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LQMD

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW

Line code format – NRZ


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 2
Minimum mean launched power dBm –0.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation nm d r6.5
Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 1
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1600
Eye pattern mask – Compliant with G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm –28
Minimum receiver overload dBm –9
Maximum reflectance dB –27

12.3.7 LQMS Board Specifications


SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above
completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI,
or FE signals.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-21


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Table 12-22 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the LQMS
Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ


Optical source type – MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target distance km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range
Maximum mean dBm –3 0 3 3
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –10 –5 –2 –2
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
ratio
Maximum –20 dB nm NA 1 1 1
spectral width
Minimum side mode dB NA 30 30 30
suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask – G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN PIN APD APD
Operating wavelength nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –18 –27 –28
Minimum receiver dBm –3 0 –9 –9
overload
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27 –27

GE Optical Module at the Client Side

2.125 Gbit/s multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The
specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly
different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.

12-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can
be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Table 12-23 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LQMS

Item Unit Value

Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s 1000 1000 1000


Type Multi-rate BASE-LX-10 BASE-LX-40 BASE-ZX-80
km km km

Line code format – 8B/10B 8B/10B 8B/10B 8B/10B


Target distance km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm –2.5 –3 3 5
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –9.5 –11.5 –2 –2
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 9 9 9 9
ratio
Eye pattern mask – IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –17 –19 –21 –21
Minimum receiver dBm 0 –3 –3 –3
overload

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-23


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Optical Module at DWDM Side

Table 12-24 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LQMS

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800


ps/nm- ps/nm- ps/nm-PI ps/nm-2m ps/nm-
PIN APD N W-APD tunable

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched dBm –1 –1 3 3 3
power
Minimum mean launched dBm –5 –5 –2 –2 –1
power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz r10
Maximum –20 dB spectral nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2
width
Minimum side mode dB 35 35 30 30 35
suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800
Eye pattern mask – G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN APD PIN APD APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –25 –18 –25 –30
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0 –9 0 –9 –9
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27 –27 –27
a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and the 12800 ps/nm-APD that are fixed-wavelength optical modules do not support point access mode.

12-24 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Optical Module at CWDM Side

Table 12-25 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LQMS

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW

Line code format – NRZ


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 5
Minimum mean launched power dBm 2.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation nm d r6.5
Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 1
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1600
Eye pattern mask – Compliant with G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm –28
Minimum receiver overload dBm –9
Maximum reflectance dB –27

12.3.8 LWXD Board Specifications


SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above
completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI,
or FE signals.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-25


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Table 12-26 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the LWXD
Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ


Optical source type – MLM SLM SLM
Target distance km 2 15 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580
range
Maximum mean dBm –3 0 3
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –10 –5 –2
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 8.2 8.2 8.2
ratio
Maximum –20 dB nm NA 1 1
spectral width
Minimum side mode dB NA 30 30
suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask – G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN PIN APD
Operating wavelength nm 1200 to 1650 1200 to 1650 1200 to 1650
range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –18 –28
Minimum receiver dBm –3 0 –9
overload
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27

GE Optical Module at the Client Side

2.125 Gbit/s multi-rate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.

12-26 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Table 12-27 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LWXD
Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate

Line code format – 8B/10B


Optical source type – MLM
Target distance km 0.5
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength range nm 830 to 860
Maximum mean launched dBm –2.5
power
Minimum mean launched dBm –9.5
power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9
Maximum –20 dB spectral nm NA
width
Minimum side mode dB NA
suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask – IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 770 to 860
Receiver sensitivity dBm –17
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0
Maximum reflectance dB NA

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-27


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Optical Module at DWDM Side

Table 12-28 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LWXD

Item Unit Value

Optical Module 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800ps/n


Type ps/nm-PINa ps/nm-APDa ps/nm-PIN ps/nm-2mW m-tunable
-APD

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean dBm –4 –4 0 0 0
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –8 –8 –5 –5 –4
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10
ratio
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency GHz r10
deviation
Maximum –20 dB nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2
spectral width
Minimum side mode dB 35 35 30 30 35
suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/n 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800
m
Eye pattern mask – G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN APD PIN APD APD
Operating nm 1200 to 1650
wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –25 –18 –25 –30
Minimum receiver dBm 0 –9 0 –9 –9
overload
Maximum dB –27 –27 –27 –27 –27
reflectance
a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and the 12800 ps/nm-APD that are fixed-wavelength optical modules do not support point access mode.

12-28 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Optical Module at CWDM Side

Table 12-29 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LWXD

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW

Line code format – NRZ


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 2
Minimum mean launched power dBm –0.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation nm d r6.5
Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 1
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1600
Eye pattern mask – Compliant with G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm –28
Minimum receiver overload dBm –9
Maximum reflectance dB –27

12.3.9 LWXS Board Specifications


SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above
completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI,
or FE signals.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-29


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Table 12-30 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the LWXS
Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ


Optical source type – MLM SLM SLM
Target distance km 2 15 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580
range
Maximum mean dBm –3 0 3
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –10 –5 –2
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 8.2 8.2 8.2
ratio
Maximum –20 dB nm NA 1 1
spectral width
Minimum side mode dB NA 30 30
suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask – G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN PIN APD
Operating wavelength nm 1200 to 1650 1200 to 1650 1200 to 1650
range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –18 –28
Minimum receiver dBm –3 0 –9
overload
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27

GE Optical Module at the Client Side

2.125 Gbit/s multi-rate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.

12-30 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Table 12-31 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LWXS
Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate

Line code format – 8B/10B


Optical source type – MLM
Target distance km 0.5
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength range nm 830 to 860
Maximum mean launched dBm –2.5
power
Minimum mean launched dBm –9.5
power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9
Maximum –20 dB spectral nm NA
width
Minimum side mode dB NA
suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask – IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 770 to 860
Receiver sensitivity dBm –17
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0
Maximum reflectance dB NA

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-31


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Optical Module at DWDM Side

Table 12-32 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LWXS

Item Unit Value

Optical Module 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800ps/nm-


Type ps/nm-PINa ps/nm-APDa ps/nm-PIN ps/nm-2mW- tunable
APD

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean dBm –1 –1 3 3 3
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –5 –5 –2 –2 –1
launched power
Minimum dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10
extinction ratio
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency GHz r10
deviation
Maximum –20 dB nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2
spectral width
Minimum side dB 35 35 30 30 35
mode suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800
tolerance
Eye pattern mask – G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN APD PIN APD APD
Operating nm 1200 to 1650
wavelength range
Receiver dBm –18 –25 –18 –25 –30
sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 –9 0 –9 –9
receiver overload
Maximum dB –27 –27 –27 –27 –27
reflectance
a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and the 12800 ps/nm-APD that are fixed-wavelength optical modules do not support point access mode.

12-32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Optical Module at CWDM Side

Table 12-33 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LWXS

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW

Line code format – NRZ


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 5
Minimum mean launched power dBm 2.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation nm d r6.5
Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 1
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1600
Eye pattern mask – Compliant with G.957

Receiver parameter specifications at point R


Receiver type – APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm –28
Minimum receiver overload dBm –9
Maximum reflectance dB –27

12.3.10 LWX2 Board Specifications


SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above
completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI,
or FE signals.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-33


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Table 12-34 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the LWX2
Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ


Optical source type – MLM SLM SLM
Target distance km 2 15 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580
range
Maximum mean dBm –3 0 3
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –10 –5 –2
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 8.2 8.2 8.2
ratio
Maximum –20 dB nm NA 1 1
spectral width
Minimum side mode dB NA 30 30
suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask – G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN PIN APD
Operating wavelength nm 1200 to 1650 1200 to 1650 1200 to 1650
range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –18 –28
Minimum receiver dBm –3 0 –9
overload
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27

GE Optical Module at the Client Side

2.125 Gbit/s multi-rate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.

12-34 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Table 12-35 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the LWX2
Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate

Line code format – 8B/10B


Optical source type – MLM
Target distance km 0.5
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength range nm 830 to 860
Maximum mean launched dBm –2.5
power
Minimum mean launched dBm –9.5
power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9
Maximum –20 dB spectral nm NA
width
Minimum side mode dB NA
suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask – IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 770 to 860
Receiver sensitivity dBm –17
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0
Maximum reflectance dB NA

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-35


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Optical Module at DWDM Side

Table 12-36 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the LWX2

Item Unit Value

Optical Module 12800ps/nm- 12800ps/nm- 6500 3200


Type PINa APDa ps/nm-PIN ps/nm-2mW-APD

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean dBm –1 –1 3 3
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –5 –5 –2 –2
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 10 10 8.2 8.2
ratio
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency GHz r10
deviation
Maximum –20 dB nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5
spectral width
Minimum side mode dB 35 35 30 30
suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200
Eye pattern mask – G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN APD PIN APD
Operating wavelength nm 1200 to 1650
range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –25 –18 –25
Minimum receiver dBm 0 –9 0 –9
overload
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27 –27
a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and the 12800 ps/nm-APD that are fixed-wavelength optical modules do not support point access mode.

12-36 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Optical Module at CWDM Side

Table 12-37 Specifications of optical module at CWDM side of the LWX2

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW

Line code format – NRZ


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 5
Minimum mean launched power dBm 2.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation nm d r6.5
Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 1
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1600
Eye pattern mask – Compliant with G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm –28
Minimum receiver overload dBm –9
Maximum reflectance dB –27

12.4 Tributary Unit Specifications


12.4.1 TQM Board Specifications
SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above
completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI,
or FE signals.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-37


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Table 12-38 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the TQM
Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ


Optical source type – MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target distance km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range
Maximum mean dBm –3 0 3 3
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –10 –5 –2 –2
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
ratio
Maximum –20 dB nm NA 1 1 1
spectral width
Minimum side mode dB NA 30 30 30
suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask – G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN PIN APD APD
Operating wavelength nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –18 –27 –28
Minimum receiver dBm –3 0 –9 –9
overload
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27 –27

GE Optical Module at the Client Side

2.125 Gbit/s multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The
specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly
different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.

12-38 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can
be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Table 12-39 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the TQM

Item Unit Value

Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s 1000 1000 1000


Type Multi-rate BASE-LX-10 BASE-LX-40 BASE-ZX-80
km km km

Line code format – 8B/10B 8B/10B 8B/10B 8B/10B


Target distance km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm –2.5 –3 3 5
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –9.5 –11.5 –2 –2
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 9 9 9 9
ratio
Eye pattern mask – IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –17 –19 –21 –21
Minimum receiver dBm 0 –3 –3 –3
overload

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-39


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

12.4.2 TDG Board Specifications


GE Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 12-40 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side of the TDG

Item Unit Value

Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s 1000 1000 1000


Type Multi-rate BASE-LX-10 BASE-LX-40 BASE-ZX-80
km km km

Line code format – 8B/10B 8B/10B 8B/10B 8B/10B


Target distance km 0.5 10 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm –2.5 –3 3 5
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –9.5 –11.5 –2 –2
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 9 9 9 9
ratio
Eye pattern mask – IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –17 –19 –21 –21
Minimum receiver dBm 0 –3 –3 –3
overload

12.4.3 TQS Board Specifications


SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

This module is used to access STM-16 and OTU1 signals. The specifications listed above completely
apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are OTU1 signals.

12-40 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Table 12-41 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side of the TQS
Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ


Optical source type – MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target distance km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range
Maximum mean dBm –3 0 3 3
launched power
Minimum mean dBm –10 –5 –2 –2
launched power
Minimum extinction dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
ratio
Maximum –20 dB nm NA 1 1 1
spectral width
Minimum side mode dB NA 30 30 30
suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask – G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN PIN APD APD
Operating wavelength nm 1270 to 1580 1270 to 1580 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –18 –27 –28
Minimum receiver dBm –3 0 –9 –9
overload
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27 –27

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-41


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

12.5 Line Unit Specifications


12.5.1 NS2 Board Specifications
Optical Module at DWDM Side

Table 12-42 Specifications of optical module at DWDM side of the NS2

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 800 1600 1200 1200 4800


ps/nm ps/nm ps/nm-t ps/nm-t ps/nm-t
unable unable unable

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ- NRZ- ODB-


tunable tunable tunable
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0 4 4 4 4
Minimum mean launched power dBm –5 0 0 0 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10 10 10 NA
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz r10
Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side mode suppression dB 35 35 35 35 35
ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800 1600 1200 1200 4800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type – PIN APD PIN APD APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm –14 –25 –16 –25 –27
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0 –9 0 –9 –8
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27 –27 –27

12-42 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

12.6 Optical Multiplexer Unit and Demultiplexer Unit


Specifications
12.6.1 M40 Board Specifications
Table 12-43 M40 board specifications

Item Unit Value

Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100


Insertion loss dB ” 6.5
Optical return loss dB > 40
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 22
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
Polarization dependence loss dB ” 0.5
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB ”2

12.6.2 MV40 Board Specifications


Table 12-44 MV40 board specifications

Item Unit Value

Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100


Insertion loss dB ” 8a
Optical return loss dB > 40
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 22
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
Attenuation range dB 0 to 15
Polarization dependence loss dB ” 0.5
Maximum channel insertion loss dB ”3
difference
a: Before delivery, the VOA value of each channel is set as 3dB. Thus, the value of insertion loss may be 13
dB in testing. The VOA value can be adjusted according to the actual requirement.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-43


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

12.6.3 D40 Board Specifications


Table 12-45 D40 board specifications

Item Unit Value

Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100


Insertion loss dB ” 6.5
Optical return loss dB > 40
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
Polarization dependent loss dB ” 0.5
Maximum channel insertion loss dB ”2
difference
–1 dB bandwidth nm > 0.4
–20 dB bandwidth nm < 1.4

12.6.4 D40V Board Specifications


Table 12-46 D40V board specifications

Item Unit Value

Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100


Insertion loss dB ” 8a
Optical return loss dB > 40
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 22
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
Attenuation range dB 0 to 15
Polarization dependence loss dB ” 0.5
Maximum channel insertion loss dB ”3
difference
a: Before delivery, the VOA value of each channel is set as 3dB. Thus, the value of insertion loss may be 13
dB in testing. The VOA value can be adjusted according to the actual requirement.

12-44 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

12.6.5 FIU Board Specifications


Table 12-47 FIU board specifications

Corresponding Item Unit Value


Interfaces

– Operating wavelength range of main path nm 1529 to 1561


– Operating wavelength range of optical GHz 1500 to 1520
supervisory channel
– Optical return loss dB > 40
IN-TM Insertion loss dB ” 1.5
RM-OUT
IN-TC Insertion loss dB ”1
RC-OUT
IN-TM Isolation dB > 40
IN-TC Isolation dB > 12

12.7 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer Unit


Specifications
12.7.1 MR2 Board Specifications
Table 12-48 MR2 board specifications

Corresponding Item Unit Value


Interfaces

– Operating wavelength nm 1529 to 1561


range
– Adjacent channel GHz 100
spacing
IN-D1 0.5 dB spectral width nm t r0.11
IN-D2
Drop channel insertion dB ” 1.5
loss
Adjacent channel dB > 25
isolation
Non-adjacent channel dB > 35
isolation
A1-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width nm t r0.11

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-45


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Corresponding Item Unit Value


Interfaces
A2-OUT Add channel insertion dB ” 1.5
loss
IN-MO Insertion loss dB ” 1.0
MI-OUT Isolation dB > 13
– Optical return loss dB > 40

12.7.2 MR4 Board Specifications


Table 12-49 MR4 board specifications

Corresponding Item Unit Value


Interfaces

– Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561


– Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
IN-D1 0.5 dB spectral width nm t r0.11
IN-D2
IN-D3 Drop channel insertion loss dB ” 2.2
IN-D4
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
Non-adjacent channel dB > 35
isolation
A1-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width nm t r0.11
A2-OUT
A3-OUT Add channel insertion loss dB ” 2.2
A4-OUT
IN-MO Insertion loss dB ” 1.5
MI-OUT Isolation dB > 13
– Optical return loss dB > 40

12.7.3 MR8 Board Specifications


Table 12-50 MR8 board specifications
Corresponding Item Unit Value
Interfaces

– Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561


– Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100

12-46 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Corresponding Item Unit Value


Interfaces

IN-D1 0.5 dB spectral width nm t r0.11


IN-D2
IN-D3 Drop channel insertion loss dB ”4
IN-D4
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
IN-D5
IN-D6 Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 35
IN-D7
IN-D8
A1-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width nm t r0.11
A2-OUT
A3-OUT Add channel insertion loss dB ”4
A4-OUT
A5-OUT
A6-OUT
A7-OUT
A8-OUT
IN-MO Insertion loss dB ” 3.5
MI-OUT Isolation dB > 13
– Optical return loss dB > 40

12.7.4 CMR2 Board Specifications


Table 12-51 CMR2 board specifications

Corresponding Item Unit Value


Interfaces

– Operating wavelength range nm 1271 to 1611


– Adjacent channel spacing GHz 20
IN-D1 0.5 dB spectral width nm t r6.5
IN-D2
Drop channel insertion loss dB ” 1.5
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 35
A1-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width nm t r6.5
A2-OUT
Add channel insertion loss dB ” 1.5
IN-MO Insertion loss dB ” 1.0
MI-OUT Isolation dB > 13
Optical return loss dB > 40

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-47


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

12.7.5 CMR4 Board Specifications


Table 12-52 CMR4 board specifications

Corresponding Item Unit Value


Interfaces

– Operating wavelength range nm 1291 to 1611


– Adjacent channel spacing GHz 20
IN-D1 0.5 dB spectral width nm t r6.5
IN-D2
IN-D3 Drop channel insertion loss dB ”2
IN-D4
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 35
A1-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width nm t r6.5
A2-OUT
A3-OUT Add channel insertion loss dB ”2
A4-OUT
IN-MO Insertion loss dB ” 1.5
MI-OUT Isolation dB > 13
Optical return loss dB > 40

12.8 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing


Unit Specifications
12.8.1 ROAM Board Specifications
Table 12-53 ROAM board specifications

Item Unit Value

Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100


Insertion loss Mxa-OUT dB ” 9b
IN-DM dB ”7
EXPI-OUT dB ” 14b
IN-EXPO dB ”3
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 22

12-48 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Item Unit Value

Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 25


Attenuation range dB 0 to20
Polarization dependence loss dB ” 1.5
Module switch time ms ” 50
a: Mx represents the channel-adding interface.
b: Tested value when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

12.8.2 WSM9 Board Specifications


Table 12-54 WSM9 board specifications

Item Unit Value

Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100


Insertion loss Mxa-OUT dB ” 8b
EXPI-OUT
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561
Extinction ratio dB • 35
Attenuation range dB 0 to15
Dimension 9×1
a: AMx represents the AM1–AM8 interface.
b: Tested value when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

12.8.3 WSD9 Board Specifications


Table 12-55 WSD9 board specifications
Item Unit Value

Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100


Insertion loss IN-DMxa dB ” 8b
IN-EXPO
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561
Extinction ratio dB • 35
Attenuation range dB 0 to15

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-49


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Item Unit Value

Dimension 1×9

a: DMx represents the DM1–DM8 interface.


b: Tested value when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

12.8.4 RMU9 Board Specifications


Table 12-56 RMU9 board specifications

Item Unit Value

Insertion loss EXPI-OUT dB ” 8.5


a
AMx -TOA dB ” 12.5b
ROA-OUT dB ” 1.5
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to1561
Optical return loss dB > 40
Attenuation range dB 0 to15
Polarization dependence loss dB ” 0.5
Attenuation accuracy dB ”1
a: AMx represents the AM1–AM8 interface.
b: Tested value when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

12.9 Optical Amplifier Unit Specifications


12.9.1 OAU1 Board Specifications
Table 12-57 OAU1board specifications
Item Unit Value

OAU1-C01

Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561


Total input power range dBm –32 to 0
Total output power range dBm –1 to 20
Typical input power of single dBm –27 to –16
wavelength

12-50 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Item Unit Value

OAU1-C01

Maximum output power of single dBm 4


wavelength
Channel gain dB 20 to 31
Noise figure dB d 8.5
(when the gain is 20 dB)

d 6.5
(when the gain is 23 dB)

d 5.5
(when the gain is t26dB)
Gain flatness dB d 2.0
Gain spectrum-shape pre-tilt dB 1.0±0.2

12.9.2 OBU1 Board Specifications


Table 12-58 OBU1 board specifications

Item Unit Value

OBU1-C01 OBU1-C02

Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561 1529 to 1561


Total input power range dBm –32 to –4 –32 to –3
Total output power range dBm –12 to 16 –9 to 20
Typical input power of single dBm –20 –19
wavelength
Maximum output power of single dBm 0 4
wavelength
Noise figure dB d 5.5 d 6.0
Channel gain dB 20±1.5 23±1.5
Gain flatness dB d 2.0 d 2.0
Gain spectrum-shape pre-tilt dB 0±0.2 1.0±0.2

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-51


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

12.9.3 CRPC Board Specifications


Table 12-59 CRPC board specifications

Item Unit Value

Pump wavelength range nm 1400 to 1500


Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561
Maximum pump power dBm 29
Channel gain on G.652 fiber dB •10
Channel gain on LEAF fiber dB •12
Effective noise figure on G.652 dB ”0
fiber
Effective noise figure on LEAF dB ” –1
fiber
Polarization dependence loss dB ” 0.5

12.10 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit Specifications


12.10.1 SC1 Board Specifications
Table 12-60 SC1 board specifications

Item Unit Value

Operating wavelength range of nm 1500 to 1520


optical supervisory channel
Signal rate Mbit/s 16.896/4.096
Signal coding – CMI
Launched optical power dBm 2 to 4.5
Receiver sensitivity dBm d –48

12-52 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

12.10.2 SC2 Board Specifications


Table 12-61 SC2 board specifications

Item Unit Value

Operating wavelength range of nm 1500 to 1520


optical supervisory channel
Signal rate Mbit/s 16.896/4.096
Signal coding – CMI
Launched optical power dBm 2 to 4.5
Receiver sensitivity dBm d –48

12.11 Optical Protection Unit Specifications


12.11.1 OLP Board Specifications
Table 12-62 OLP board specifications

Corresponding Item Unit Value


Interfaces

TI-TO1 Single-mode insertion loss dB ”4


TI-TO2
Multimode insertion loss dB ”4.5
RI1-RO Single-mode insertion loss dB ”1.5
RI2-RO
Multimode insertion loss dB ”2
Range of the input optical power dBm 7 to –35
a
Switching threshold of optical power difference dB 5
a: The user can set the switching threshold of optical power difference.

12.11.2 SCS Board Specifications


Table 12-63 SCS board specifications

Corresponding Item Unit Value


Interfaces

TI1-TO11 Single-mode insertion loss dB ”4

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-53


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Corresponding Item Unit Value


Interfaces
TI1-TO21 Multimode insertion loss dB ”4.5
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
RI1-RO11 Single-mode insertion loss dB ”4
RI1-RO12 Multimode insertion loss dB ”4.5
RI2-RO21
RI2-RO22

12.11.3 DCP Board Specifications


Table 12-64 DCP board specifications

Corresponding Item Unit Value


Interfaces

TI1-TO11 Single-mode insertion loss dB ”4


TI1-TO21
Multimode insertion loss dB ”4.5
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
RI1-RO11 Single-mode insertion loss dB ”1.5
RI1-RO12
Multimode insertion loss dB ”2
RI2-RO21
RI2-RO22
Range of the input optical power dBm 7 to –35
a
Switching threshold of optical power difference dB 5
a: The user can set the switching threshold of optical power difference.

12.12 Spectrum Analyzer Unit Specifications


12.12.1 MCA4 Board Specifications
Table 12-65 MCA4 board specifications
Item Unit Value

Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561


Detect range for single channel dBm –10 to –30
optical power

12-54 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description 12 Technical Specifications

Item Unit Value

Detect accuracy for optical power dBm ±1.5


Detect accuracy for OSNR dB ±1.5
Detect accuracy for central nm ±0.1
wavelength

12.12.2 MCA8 Board Specifications


Table 12-66 MCA8 board specifications

Item Unit Value

Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561


Detect range for single channel dBm –10 to –30
optical power
Detect accuracy for optical power dBm ±1.5
Detect accuracy for OSNR dB ±1.5
Detect accuracy for central nm ±0.1
wavelength

12.13 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit Specifications


12.13.1 VA1 Board Specifications
Table 12-67 VA1 board specifications

Item Unit Value

Attenuation range dB 1.5 to 21.5


Adjustment accuracy dB 1

12.13.2 VA4 Board Specifications


Table 12-68 VA4 board specifications

Item Unit Value

Attenuation range of each dB 1.5 to 21.5


channel

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-55


OptiX OSN 6800
12 Technical Specifications Product Description

Item Unit Value

Adjustment accuracy dB 1

12.14 DCM Specifications


Table 12-69 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of L-band (G.652
fiber)

Item Distance Max. DSCR PMD PDL Max. Allow Operation


Type (km) Insertion (ps) (dB) Power Wavelength
Loss(dB) (dBm) (nm)

DCM(A) 20 3.3 90% to 0.4 0.1 20 1525 to 1565


110%
DCM(B) 40 4.7 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(C) 60 6.4 0.6 0.1 20
DCM(D) 80 8 0.7 0.1 20
DCM(E) 100 9 0.8 0.1 20
DCM(F) 120 9.8 0.8 0.1 20

Table 12-70 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (G.655
LEAF fiber)

Item Distance Max. DSCR PMD PDL Max. Operation


Type (km) Insertion (ps) (dB) Allow Wavelength
Loss(dB) Power (nm)
(dBm)

DCM(A) 20 3.3 90% to 0.4 0.3 24 1525 to 1568


110%
DCM(B) 40 4.7 0.5 0.3 24
DCM(C) 60 6.4 0.6 0.3 24
DCM(D) 80 8 0.7 0.3 24
DCM(E) 100 9 0.8 0.3 24
DCM(F) 120 9.8 0.9 0.3 20

12-56 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Contents

A Environment Requirements.................................................................................................. A-1


A.1 Performance Specifications for Optical Interfaces ......................................................................................A-2
A.2 Power Source Requirements........................................................................................................................A-2
A.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility....................................................................................................................A-2
A.4 Environment Requirement ..........................................................................................................................A-2
A.4.1 Storage Environment..........................................................................................................................A-3
A.4.2 Transport Environment.......................................................................................................................A-5
A.4.3 Operation Environment......................................................................................................................A-7

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Tables

Table A-1 Requirements on climate environment..............................................................................................A-3


Table A-2 Requirements on the density of mechanically active substance........................................................A-4
Table A-3 Requirements on the density of chemical active substance ..............................................................A-4

Table A-4 Requirements on mechanical stress ..................................................................................................A-4


Table A-5 Requirements on climate environment..............................................................................................A-5
Table A-6 Requirements on the density of mechanically active substance........................................................A-6

Table A-7 Requirements on the density of chemical active substance ..............................................................A-6


Table A-8 Requirements on mechanical stress ..................................................................................................A-6
Table A-9 Requirements on temperature, humidity ...........................................................................................A-7

Table A-10 Other requirements on climate environment...................................................................................A-7


Table A-11 Requirements on the density of mechanically active substance......................................................A-8
Table A-12 Requirements on the density of chemical active substance ............................................................A-8

Table A-13 Requirements on mechanical stress ................................................................................................A-9

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description A Environment Requirements

A Environment Requirements

About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

Section Describes

A.1 Performance Specifications for Performance specifications for optical interfaces of


Optical Interfaces the OptiX OSN 6800.
A.2 Power Source Requirements Requirements of the power source.
A.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility Electromagnetic compatibility of the OptiX OSN
6800.
A.4 Environment Requirement Requirements of the environment, including the
climate, the biologic, the air clarity and the
mechanical stress.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-1


OptiX OSN 6800
A Environment Requirements Product Description

A.1 Performance Specifications for Optical Interfaces


SDH optical interfaces: ITU-T G.691-compliant and ITU-T G.957-compliant
SONET optical interfaces: GR-253-CORE, GR-1377-CORE and ANSI T1.105
OTN optical interfaces: ITU-T G.709 and ITU-T G.959.1
10GE optical signal interface: 10GBASE-LR and 10GBASE-ER
GE optical interfaces: IEEE 802.3z-compliant
ESCON optical interfaces: ANSI X3.296, ANSI X3.230-compliant
FC optical interfaces: ANSI X3.303, ANSI X3.230-compliant
Optical fiber connector: LC/PC
Laser security: In compliance with ITU-T G.664 (with ALS function).

A.2 Power Source Requirements


DC input voltage: –48 V/–60 V DC
Voltage range: –38.4 V to –72.0 V DC

A.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility


The system is in compliance with ETS 300 386, including:
Radiated Emission: EN55022
Conducted Emission: EN55022
Electrostatic Discharge: IEC61000-4-2
Conducted Sensitivity: IEC61000-4-6
Electrical Fast Transient/Burst: IEC61000-4-4
Radiated Sensitivity: IEC61000-4-3
Surge: IEC61000-4-5
Voltage Dips and Short Interruption: IEC61000-4-29

A.4 Environment Requirement


The following ITU-T Recommendations are taken as the reference for framing the
environment requirements.
z GF 014-95: Environment conditions for the communication equipment room
z ETS 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 Partly temperature-controlled locations

A-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description A Environment Requirements

z NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) requirement:


Physical protection

A.4.1 Storage Environment


Climate Environment

Table A-1 Requirements on climate environment

Item Range

Altitude d 5000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature –40qC to +70qC
Temperature change rate d 1qC /min
Relative humidity 10% to 100%
Solar radiation d 1120 W/s²
Heat radiation d 600 W/s²
Wind speed d 30 m/s

Waterproof Requirement
z Equipment storage requirements at the customer site: Generally the equipment is stored
indoors.
z There should be no water on the floor and no water leakage on the packing boxes of the
equipment. The equipment should not be stored in places where there is possible leakage,
such as near the auto firefighting and heating facilities.
z If the equipment is required to be stored outdoors, the following four conditions should
be met at the same time:
í The packing boxes are intact.
í Necessary rainproof measures should have been taken to prevent rainwater from
entering the packing boxes.
í There is no water on the ground where the packing boxes are stored, let alone water
entering into the packing boxes.
í The packing boxes are not directly exposed to the sun.

Biologic Environment
z Avoiding the reproduction of animalcule, such as epiphyte and mildew.
z Getting rid of rodent (such as mice).

Clarity of Air
z No explosive, conductive, magnetic conductive or corrosive dust.
z The density of mechanically active substance meets the requirements listed in Table A-2.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-3


OptiX OSN 6800
A Environment Requirements Product Description

z The density of chemical active substance meets the requirements listed in Table A-3.

Table A-2 Requirements on the density of mechanically active substance

Mechanically Active Substance Content

Suspending dust d 5.00 mg/m³


Precipitable dust d 20.0 mg/m²·h
Sand d 300 mg/m³

Table A-3 Requirements on the density of chemical active substance

Chemical Active Substance Content

SO2 d 0.30 mg/m³


H2S d 0.10 mg/m³
NO2 d 0.50 mg/m³
NH3 d 1.00 mg/m³
CI2 d 0.10 mg/m³
HCI d 0.10 mg/m³
HF d 0.01 mg/m³
O3 d 0.05 mg/m³

Mechanical Stress

Table A-4 Requirements on mechanical stress

Item Sub-item Range

Sinusoidal vibration Displacement d 7.0 mm –

Acceleration – d 20.0 m/s²


Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200
Hz
Non-steady impact Impact response spectrum II d 250 m/s²
Static load d 5 kPa

A-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description A Environment Requirements

Item Sub-item Range

Note:
Impact response spectrum: the curve of the maximum acceleration response generated by the
equipment under the stipulated impact motivation. Impact response spectrum II indicates the duration
of semi sinusoidal impact spectrum is 6ms.
Static load: The pressure from upside, that the equipment with package can endure when the equipment
is piled as per stipulation.

A.4.2 Transport Environment


Climate Environment

Table A-5 Requirements on climate environment

Item Range

Altitude d 5000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature –40qC to +70qC
Temperature change rate d 3qC /min
Relative humidity 10% to 100%
Solar radiation d 1120 W/s²
Heat radiation d 600 W/s²
Wind speed d 30 m/s

Waterproof Requirement
The following conditions should be met during the transportation:
z The packing boxes are intact.
z Necessary rainproof measures should be taken for the means of transport to prevent
rainwater from entering the packing boxes.
z There is no water in the means of transportation.

Biologic Environment
z Avoiding the reproduction of animalcule, such as epiphyte, mildew.
z Getting rid of rodent (such as mice).

Clarity of Air
z No explosive, conductive, magnetic conductive or corrosive dust.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-5


OptiX OSN 6800
A Environment Requirements Product Description

z The density of mechanically active substance complies with the requirements of Table
A-6.
z The density of chemical active substance complies with the requirements of Table A-7.

Table A-6 Requirements on the density of mechanically active substance

Mechanically Active Substance Content

Suspending dust No requirement


Precipitable dust d 3.0 mg/m²·h
Sand d 100 mg/m³

Table A-7 Requirements on the density of chemical active substance

Chemical Active Substance Content

SO2 d 0.30 mg/m³


H2S d 0.10 mg/m³
NO2 d 0.50 mg/m³
NH3 d 1.00 mg/m³
CI2 d 0.10 mg/m³
HCI d 0.10 mg/m³
HF d 0.01 mg/m³
O3 d 0.05 mg/m³

Mechanical Stress

Table A-8 Requirements on mechanical stress

Item Sub-item Range

Sinusoidal Displacement d 7.5 mm – –


vibration
Acceleration – d 20.0 m/s² d 40.0 m/s²
Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 200 Hz to
Hz 500 Hz
Random vibration Acceleration spectrum 10 m²/s³ 3 m²/s³ 1 m²/s³
density
Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 200 Hz to
Hz 500 Hz

A-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description A Environment Requirements

Item Sub-item Range

Non-steady Impact response d 300 m/s²


impact spectrum II
Static load d 10 kPa

Note:
Impact response spectrum: the curve of the maximum acceleration response generated by the
equipment under the stipulated impact motivation. Impact response spectrum II indicates the duration
of semi sinusoidal impact spectrum is 6ms.
Static load: The pressure from upside, that the equipment with package can endure when the equipment
is piled as per stipulation.

A.4.3 Operation Environment


Climate Environment

Table A-9 Requirements on temperature, humidity

Equipment Temperature Relative Humidity


Name
Long-term Short-term Long-term Short-term
Operation Operation Operation Operation

0qC to 45qC –5qC to 50qC 10% to 90% 5% to 95%

Note:
Testing point of product temperature and humidity: when the cabinet of the product has no protection
board in the front and at the back, the value is tested 1.5 meters above the floor and 0.4 meter in front of
the cabinet.
Short-term working condition means that the successive working time does not exceed 96 hours and the
accumulated time every year does not exceed 15 days.

Table A-10 Other requirements on climate environment

Item Range

Altitude d 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature change rate d 5qC /h
Solar radiation d 700 W/s²
Heat radiation d 600 W/s²
Wind speed d 1 m/s

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-7


OptiX OSN 6800
A Environment Requirements Product Description

Biologic Environment
z Avoiding the reproduction of animalcule, such as epiphyte, mildew.
z Getting rid of rodent (such as mice).

Clarity of Air
z No explosive, conductive, magnetic conductive or corrosive dust.
z The density of mechanically active substance meets the requirements listed in Table
A-11.
z The density of chemical active substance meets the requirements listed in Table A-12.

Table A-11 Requirements on the density of mechanically active substance

Mechanically Active Substance Content

Dust particle d 3 u 105 particle/m³


Suspending dust d 0.4 mg/m³
Precipitable dust d 15 mg/m²·h
Sand d 100 mg/m³

Table A-12 Requirements on the density of chemical active substance

Chemical Active Substance Content

SO2 d 0.20 mg/m³


H2S d 0.006 mg/m³
NH3 d 0.05 mg/m³
CI2 d 0.01 mg/m³
HCI d 0.10 mg/m³
HF d 0.01 mg/m³
O3 d 0.005 mg/m³
CO d 5.0 mg/m³

A-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description A Environment Requirements

Mechanical Stress

Table A-13 Requirements on mechanical stress

Item Sub-item Range

Sinusoidal vibration Displacement d 3.5mm –

Acceleration – d 10.0 m/s²


Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 Hz
Non-steady impact Impact response d 100 m/s²
spectrum II
Static load 0

Note:
Impact response spectrum: the curve of the maximum acceleration response generated by the
equipment under the stipulated impact motivation. Impact response spectrum II indicates the duration
of semi sinusoidal impact spectrum is 6ms.
Static load: The pressure from upside, that the equipment with package can endure when the equipment
is piled as per stipulation.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-9


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Contents

B Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards ............................................................B-1

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Tables

Table B-1 OptiX OSN 6800 equipment unit information.................................................................................. B-1

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 6800 B Power Consumption, Weight and Slots
Product Description of Boards

B Power Consumption, Weight and Slots


of Boards

Table B-1 lists the board power consumption, weight and slots. Note that the power
consumption values are measured in normal working conditions (25qC) and under
temperature of 55qC.

Table B-1 OptiX OSN 6800 equipment unit information


Board Maximum Power Maximum Power Weight Slots Available
Consumption at Consumption at (kg) Occupied Slots
250C (W) 550C (W)

L4G 50.0 55.0 1.4 1 IU1–IU8,


IU11–IU16
LDGS 31.7 34.9 1.2 1 IU1–IU8,
IU11–IU16
LDGD 33.5 36.9 1.4 1 IU1–IU8,
IU11–IU16
LQMS 52.9 58.2 1.3 1 IU1–IU8,
IU11–IU16
LQMD 53.7 59.0 1.4 1 IU1–IU8,
IU11–IU16
LSX 45.5 50.1 1.3 1 IU1–IU17
LSXR 34.8 38.3 1.2 1 IU1–IU17
LWXS 33.9 37.3 1.1 1 IU1–IU17
LWXD 35.8 39.4 1.2 1 IU1–IU17
LWX2 38.5 42.4 1.3 1 IU1–IU17
M40 20.0 22.0 2.2 3 IU1–IU17
D40 20.0 22.0 2.2 3 IU1–IU17

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary B-1


B Power Consumption, Weight and Slots OptiX OSN 6800
of Boards Product Description

Board Maximum Power Maximum Power Weight Slots Available


Consumption at Consumption at (kg) Occupied Slots
250C (W) 550C (W)

M40V 38.5 42.3 2.3 3 IU1–IU17


D40V 38.5 42.3 2.3 3 IU1–IU17
FIU 4.2 4.6 1.0 1 IU1–IU17
MR2 0.2 0.3 0.9 1 IU1–IU17
MR4 0.2 0.3 0.9 1 IU1–IU17
MR8 0.2 0.3 1.0 2 IU1–IU17
CMR2 0.2 0.3 0.8 1 IU1–IU17
CMR4 0.2 0.3 0.9 1 IU1–IU17
ROAM 66.0 72.6 3.2 3 IU1–IU17
WSM9 17.0 18.7 2.2 2 IU1–IU17
WSD9 17.0 18.7 2.2 2 IU1–IU17
RMU9 11.0 12.1 1.1 1 IU1–IU17
TQM 50.8 55.9 1.2 1 IU1–IU8,
IU11–IU16
TDG 29.7 32.7 1.1 1 IU1–IU8,
IU11–IU16
TQS 43.0 47.3 1.2 1 IU1–IU8,
IU11–IU16
NS2 38.0 41.8 1.2 1 IU1–IU8,
IU11–IU16
XCS 20.0 22.0 1.0 1 IU9, IU10
OAU1 33.0 36.3 1.8 2 IU1–IU17
OBU1 16.0 17.6 1.3 1 IU1–IU17
SC1 13.5 14.9 1.0 1 IU1–IU17
SC2 13.5 14.9 1.0 1 IU1–IU17
SCC 30.0 33.0 1.2 1 IU17, IU18
AUX 14.0 15.4 0.5 1 IU21
DCP 6.8 7.5 1.0 1 IU1–IU17
OLP 6.0 6.6 0.9 1 IU1–IU17
SCS 0.2 0.3 0.8 1 IU1–IU17

B-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800 B Power Consumption, Weight and Slots
Product Description of Boards

Board Maximum Power Maximum Power Weight Slots Available


Consumption at Consumption at (kg) Occupied Slots
250C (W) 550C (W)

VA1 6.5 7.2 1.0 1 IU1–IU17


VA4 8.5 9.4 1.0 1 IU1–IU17
MCA4 16.0 17.6 1.9 2 IU1–IU17
MCA8 17.0 18.7 1.9 2 IU1–IU17

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary B-3


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Contents

C Technology Introduction ........................................................................................................C-1


C.1 OTN Technology ......................................................................................................................................... C-2
C.1.1 Technical Background ........................................................................................................................ C-2
C.1.2 OTN Standard System........................................................................................................................ C-2
C.1.3 Features of OTN Technology ............................................................................................................. C-3
C.1.4 OTN Technology Realization Scheme ............................................................................................... C-3
C.2 FEC and AFEC ............................................................................................................................................ C-4
C.3 Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier ................................................................................................................... C-5
C.4 Raman Amplification................................................................................................................................... C-5
C.5 CWDM Technology..................................................................................................................................... C-6

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description Contents

Figures

Figure C-1 Raman amplifier gain spectrum ...................................................................................................... C-5


Figure C-2 Raman amplification application in OptiX OSN 6800 system ....................................................... C-6

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description C Technology Introduction

C Technology Introduction

About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

Section Describes

C.1 OTN Technology OTN technology.


C.2 FEC and AFEC FEC and AFEC.
C.3 Erbium-Doped Fiber Erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
Amplifier
C.4 Raman Amplification Raman amplification.
C.5 CWDM Technology CWDM technology.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary C-1


OptiX OSN 6800
C Technology Introduction Product Description

C.1 OTN Technology


C.1.1 Technical Background
The SDH/SONET and WDM are the major and mature technologies used in current transport
network. The SDH/SONET mainly serves to process the electrical layer of services, which
features VC cross-connect grooming, synchronization, and single-channel line. The
SDH/SONET provides access, multiplexing, transport, flexible grooming, management and
protection for sub-rate services such as E1, T1, E3, T3 and STM-N. The WDM mainly serves
to process the optical layer of services, which features multichannel multiplexing and
demultiplexing and long haul transmission, and thus provides low-cost transport for services
of wavelength level.
As the demands for network bandwidth increasingly rise, the SDH/SONET network based on
VC grooming is lacking in expandability; the traditional WDM technology uses a manner that
client signals are directly mapped to an optical path and thus is limited to the point-to-point
application.
Under such a background, the OTN emerges as the times require. The OTN is inspired from
the SDH/SONET (mapping, multiplexing, flexible cross-connection, embedded overhead,
concatenation, protection, and FEC). The operability and manageability of the SDH/SONET
are applied to the WDM system. As a result, the OTN combines the advantages of
SDH/SONET and WDM. In addition, the OTN defines complete system architecture. In an
OTN, each network is specified with a management and monitoring mechanism; both the
optical and electrical layers have network survivability mechanism. This completely meets the
operators’ requirements for operation and maintenance.

C.1.2 OTN Standard System


The OTN standard system is mainly based on the following ITU-T recommendations:
z G.805: General functional structure of a transport network, applicable to the SDH and
OTN.
z G.806: Equipment feature description methods and general functions, applicable to the
SDH and OTN.
z G.872: Defines networks at three layers including the OCh, OMS and OTS and describes
the functions of network at each layer. G.872 also divides the OCh layer into three
sublayers including OTU, ODU and OPU.
z G.798: Specifies each atomic functional module of OTN; specifies the processing of each
layer of OTN, including the adaption function of customer/service layer and termination
and connection functions of each layer of OTN. G.798 plays a similar role to that of
G.783.
z G.709: Defines the OTN frame structure and the overhead function of each layer; defines
the mapping processing of client services into OTN, including VC mapping and OTN
multiplexing processing. G.709 plays a similar role to that of G.707.
z G.7710: General equipment management function requirements that apply to the SDH
and OTN.
z G.874: OTN management information model and function requirements that describes
based on G.7710 the five special management functions of OTN (FCAPS).
z G.808.1: General protection switching that applies to the SDH and OTN.
z G.873.1: Defines the linear ODUk protection in OTN domain.

C-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description C Technology Introduction

z ITU-T Recommendations such as G.959.1 and G.664 specify the physical-layer


characteristics of OTN. Some other recommendations are under establishment, such as
G.808.2 (general protection switching) and G.873.2 (OTN domain ring network ODUk
protection).

C.1.3 Features of OTN Technology


The OTN technology has the following features:
z The OTN uses the OPUk container to transparently adapt and transport any client service
without changing any of the payload or overhead information; provides effective
management and QoS monitoring; and is compatible with any new services in the future.
z The OTN adopts asynchronous mapping and multiplexing so that networkwide
synchronization is no longer required. This eliminates the limitation from
synchronization and simplifies the system design.
z By cross-connecting and multiplexing the ODU1 channel, the OTN enables sub-rate
services to be flexibly groomed between the OCh and client-side port, which balances
the high utilization of wavelength bandwidth and flexible end-to-end grooming.
z The OTN provides the standard FEC function to achieve a maximum coding gain of 6.2
dB (BER = 10E – 15). This decreases the OSNR tolerance of optical channels; stretches
the electrical regeneration distance; reduces the number of system stations; and lowers
the total cost for networking.
z With different TCM monitoring initiation points, different carriers and customers can
monitor the transmission quality of the same service. This enables easy maintenance and
fault locating.
The inherent defect of OTN technology system is that in the OTN system the adaption and
mapping of future mainstream GE/10GE services are not specially considered. The bandwidth
of GE/10GE does not match that of ODUk. The bandwidth utilization of using ODU1 to
transport one channel of GE services is low. When the ODU1 is adopted to transport one
channel of GE service, the bandwidth utilization is low. When it is adopted to transport two
channels of GE services, when GFP is directly mapped into the same ODU1 in an
asynchronous manner, the service transparency and the isolation against GE become a
problem. In addition, standard OPU2 container (9.995 Gbit/s) does not have sufficient
bandwidth to transport 10GE LAN signals (10.3125 Gbit/s).

C.1.4 OTN Technology Realization Scheme


Realization Scheme of GE Services
For GE services, OPU1 is further divided into two timeslots that transport one GE each,
according to the TDM concept. Thus, the mapping, transparent transmission and isolation of
GE services are all achieved, which lays the foundation for direct cross-connect grooming of
GE-services (GE ADM). For other sub-rate services operating at rates lower than OPU1 rate
(such as FE, STM1, STM4, FDDI and ESCON), a similar method of OPU1 timeslot division
can be used to achieve service mapping.

Realization Scheme of 10GE LAN Services


For 10GE LAN service mapping, Huawei provides three solutions:
z Elevating the reference clock frequency of OPU2 mapping to increase the rate of OPU2
container to the 10GE LAN level and thus to achieve the complete mapping of 10GE
signals, based on the feature that the OTU frame size is fixed while the frame frequency

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary C-3


OptiX OSN 6800
C Technology Introduction Product Description

varies with the transmission rate. This solution raises the OTU2 rate up to 11.1G without
affecting the processing at layers upper than the OTU2.
z Sacrificing the bandwidth. The rate of OPU2 container is retained; hence, the bandwidth
is insufficient. As a result, 10GE services cannot be transported in full bandwidth. To
avoid message loss in case of traffic congestion, the traffic control processing at the
10GE port can be enabled to reduce the number of messages sent by equipment at the
client end. When such a solution is used, the traffic without packet loss at the 10GE port
can reach a maximum of 9.995 Gbit/s.
z Sacrificing the FEC coding gain. The frame size and frame frequency of OTU2 are
retained; and some of the FEC byte areas are used as OPU2 payload areas. As a result,
the capacity of OPU2 container is elevated and the complete mapping of 10GE signals is
achieved. Such a solution results in about 3 dB FEC coding gain loss.
Operators can select among the preceding three solutions according to actual scenarios. For
example, the third solution can be selected for short reach transmission with sufficient OSNR
margin while the first and second solutions can be selected for scenarios with small OSNR
margin.

Realization Scheme of Intercommunication with the SDH/WDM Network


The OTN, a future-oriented transport technology, must synergize the forward compatibility of
service network and backward compatibility of transport network. The DW technology of
OTN guarantees the integrity of client signals; hence, the OTN supports various services, such
as IP, ATM and SAN, both at present and in the future. The ITU-T Recommendations
regarding OTN do not define the physical characteristics of OTM-n.m signals. The channel
frequency division and channel spacing division of the OptiX OSN6800 also comply with
ITU-T G.694.1and ITU-T G.694.2. Hence, Huawei OTN equipment can interoperate with the
traditional WDM equipment.
The OptiX OSN6800 has the following features:
z Completely supports the functional requirements of each layer (including OTS, OMS,
OCh, OTU and ODU) of OTN.
z Provides a complete set of service interfaces such as TDM, ATM, SAN, FE, GE and
10GE.
z Applies to various scenarios, thanks to unified grooming of OCh, ODUk, GE and VC
services.
z Provides excellent forward and backward compatibilities.

C.2 FEC and AFEC


The optical wavelength conversion units have forward error correction (FEC) function.
In fact, the FEC technology is the error correction technology. The OTU adopts
Reed-Solomon Coding. It can correct eight byte errors at most in any location per 255 bytes,
and has a fairly powerful capability of error correction. Due to redundancy codes added, the
digital rate is increased. The FEC employed in the OptiX OSN 6800 is in compliance with the
ITU-T G.975.1 or G.975 and supports the processing of overhead as stated in the ITU-T
G.709.
The FEC function can improve the OSNR budget of the DWDM transmission system and
increase the transmission distance. In addition, the FEC function can reduce bit error rate in
line transmission, and alleviate the effects on the signal transmission quality caused by the

C-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description C Technology Introduction

aging components or deterioration of fiber performance, thereby improving the


communication quality of the DWDM transmission network.
The AFEC is a new error correction technique. It adopts two-level encoding, increases
encoding gain, and equally distributes the burst errors. AFEC is more powerful than FEC.

C.3 Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier


The system uses a mature erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) technology to amplify
C-band optical signals and thus achieves long haul transmission without electrical
regenerators. The EDFA integrates a gain lock technology and a transient control technology
to disassociate the signal gain of each channel with the total number of channels in a fiber. In
addition, the EDFA avoids burst bit errors in the existing channels when channels are
increased or decreased.

C.4 Raman Amplification


The Raman amplifier is an important application of stimulated Raman scattering (SRS).
Quartz fiber has a very broad SRS gain spectrum. It has a broad peak near the frequency of 13
THz. If a weak signal and a strong pump light are transmitted in the fiber simultaneously, and
their frequency difference is within the range of Raman gain spectrum, the weak signal beam
can be amplified. The gain spectrum of the fiber Raman amplifier is shown in the Figure C-1.

Figure C-1 Raman amplifier gain spectrum


Pump light Gain

13THz(70 nm-100 nm) 30nm

The fiber Raman amplifier is always used with the EDFA amplifier at the receive end. It
adopts distributed amplification mechanism for extra long haul and extra long span
applications, as shown in Figure C-2.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary C-5


OptiX OSN 6800
C Technology Introduction Product Description

Figure C-2 Raman amplification application in OptiX OSN 6800 system

Raman amplifier
Signal light
EDFA
EDFA Pump light
Pump light
Fiber Laser

Transmitting end Coupler Receiving end

Usually the optical fiber Raman amplifier is used at the receive end of DWDM system to
amplify optical signals. Mainly composed of pumping lasers, the Raman amplifier works in a
way of counter pumping.

NOTE
Counter pumping means the pump light is injected at the fiber end and the direction is opposite to the
main signals. This kind of pumping achieves a big phase difference between the main signals and the
pump light. And the Raman pump power vibration is leveled in the direction opposite to signal
transmission, thus effectively suppressing the noise created by the pump.

C.5 CWDM Technology


The DWDM technology is surely preferred among the existing fiber application technologies;
however, it is of high cost. Hence, the industry calls for a WDM technology of low cost. The
CWDM technology emerges as the times require.
CWDM differs with DWDM in two aspects:
z The carrier channel spacing of a CWDM system is big; hence, one fiber can afford
multiplexing of only 2 to 16 wavelengths. “Course” and “dense” derive from different
channel spaces.
z The modulated laser of a CWDM system is uncooled while that of a DWDM system is
cooled. The cooled laser requires the cooling technique to stabilize wavelengths, which
is difficult to achieve; hence, the DWDM technology is of high cost.
The DFB laser used in a CWDM system requires no cooling; hence, the cost of a CWDM
system greatly decreases to 30% of that of a DWDM system. As more and more MAN
operators start to seek for a more rational transmission solution, the CWDM system is more
and more widely accepted in the industry.
A DWDM and a CWDM system mainly differ in channel spacing of different wavelengths
transmitted in the same fiber. Currently, a CWDM system operates at 1260 nm through 1620
nm with a channel spacing of 20 nm and can multiplex 16 wavelengths. The 1400 nm band is
seldom used as this band is of large optical power loss.
Compared with a DWDM system, a CWDM system provides a certain number of
wavelengths; supports the transmission distance within 100 km; greatly lowers the system
cost; and is highly flexible. Hence, the CWDM system mainly applies to MANs. The CWDM
system provides high bandwidth with low cost and thus applies to various prevalent networks
such as the point-to-point, Ethernet, and SONET ring. The CWDM system is especially
applicable for communication scenarios with short distance, high bandwidth and dense access
points, such as intra- or inter-building network communication.

C-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-02-14)


OptiX OSN 6800
Product Description C Technology Introduction

The CWDM technology compromises the cost and performance and thus inevitably has some
limitations in performance. Experts of the industry say that currently the CWDM technology
mainly has the following three disadvantages:
z The CWDM system can multiplex less wavelengths in a single fiber, which results in
high cost to expand the system in the future.
z The cost of equipment such as multiplexer and multiplexing modulator still requires
further reduction; such equipment cannot just be simply remodeled from the
corresponding equipment of the DWDM system.
z The CWDM technology has not standardized yet.

Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Huawei Technologies Proprietary C-7

You might also like